Home

2009 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual - Dealer e

1. Roof SUR KO OF ES ER ane a S oetee eine Running the Vehicle While Parked Safety Belt Reminders cceeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 3 27 Safety Belts GANG OF errado a RAE EEE 5 91 EXtEnNdeEr eieren rr niende na E 1 30 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 17 Lap Shoulder Belt c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee ees 1 25 Safety Belts Are for Everyone 1 12 Use During Pregnancy c eeeeeeeeeeeee ees 1 30 Safety Defects Reporting to Canadian Government 7 16 Reporting to General Motors 2 7 16 Reporting to the U S Government 7 16 Safety Warnings and Symbols 0seeeeeeeneee ees iii Scheduled Maintenance seeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 6 4 Additional Required Services eeee 6 7 Scheduling Appointments ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 7 11 Seatback Folding Passenger seeeeeeeeeees 1 8 Seats Driver Seat Height Adjuster 0 c eeeeeeee ee 1 3 Heated Seats sindene eneid ii Da 1 4 Manual Lumbat 0 c eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 4 Manual Reclining Seatbacks eeeeeeeeee 1 5 Passenger Folding Seatback 0 eeeeeeeeee 1 8 Power Seat x23 seveeidcededgencsdivecdsl Reed actinides 1 3 Split Folding Rear Seat ceceeeeeeeeee eee 1 10 11 Securing a Child Restraint Rear Seat Position ceceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeee eens 1 49 Right F
2. To dolly tow a front wheel drive vehicle with a 5 speed transmission from the front with two of its wheels on the ground 1 Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the front wheels onto the dolly Shift the transmission to P Park Firmly set the parking brake Clamp the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer s instructions Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the dolly Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF Dolly Towing All Wheel Drive Vehicles with a 5 speed Transmission Notice Towing an all wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or even with only two of its wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain components Do not tow an all wheel drive vehicle with any of its wheels on the ground If the vehicle is all wheel drive with a 5 speed transmission it cannot be towed with any of its wheels on the ground It must be towed with a platform truck or trailer 4 31 Dolly Towing Front Wheel Drive Vehicles with a 6 speed Transmission 6 Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer s instructions 7 Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the dolly 8 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF D
3. 3 32 Cooling SySteM cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeea een eeaeeaeeaes 5 22 Courtesy Transportation Program 7 11 Cruise Control 22253 saloner helse lee 3 10 Cruise Control Light W u ssssseeeeeererrere renerne 3 38 Gupholders ninnisin pinana 2 42 Customer Assistance eeeeeeeee eee eeee een eee eree 7 6 Office S iea a E E a 7 6 Text Telephone TTY Users 0 e eeeee 7 6 Customer Information Service Publications Ordering Information 7 17 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 7 2 Damage Repair Collision ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 13 Data Recorders EVGA ii cncieneindebnyaw E 7 18 Daytime Running Lamps DRL eee 3 14 Defensive Driving sons are rn anseia ea 4 2 Delayed LOCKING 23522 urinere 2 10 DIG COMPASS RS aae Eee ere 3 47 DISC MP3 eriein seere aerae anie ii 3 86 3 91 Doing Your Own Service Work u sseseeeerererereee 5 4 Dome Camp einernie roi 3 16 Door Ajar HoN eenaa a antes 3 40 Delayed Locking ersinnen 2 10 LOCKS au essence EL ed alagiesin keen 2 10 Power Door LOCKS irosen ennenen 2 10 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 11 Rear Door Security LOCKS eeeeeeeneee ees 2 11 Drive Systems All Wheel Drive 0cceeceeeeeececeneeeeeeeees 5 41 Driver Seat Height Adjuster ceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee ee 1 3 Driver Information Center DIC eeeeeeees 3 42 DIC Operation and Displays
4. eeeeeeee 3 42 DIC Vehicle Personalization eeeeeees 3 57 DIC Warnings and Messages 6 eeeeeee 3 49 Driving At Nighi eenaa a 4 14 Before a Long Trip lira aniren atise 4 15 DGIONSIVG siicsecezidaald 2 skies anker a aE Santen bane 4 2 DRUNK cetaa a aa ea Eaa EAE 4 3 Highway Hypnosis 5 enat 4 16 Hill and Mountain Roads 0 eseeeeeeee 4 16 In Rain and on Wet Roads 2 ee eee 4 14 Loss Of Control scrierea aenema 4 12 Off Road Recovery ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 12 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out 4 21 WINER ease a SENE SEEST ED TEARS YDER 4 17 Driving for Better Fuel Economy n se 4 2 DVD Rear Seat Entertainment System 3 108 EDR 285 aa e E 7 18 Electrical Equipment Add On Equipment cseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeee 5 96 Electrical System Engine Compartment Fuse Block 5 99 Fuses and Circuit Breakers cceeeeeee ees 5 97 Instrument Panel Fuse Block asac 5 97 Windshield Wiper Fuses seeeeeeeee es 5 97 Electronic Immobilizer PASS Key Ul oo ccccccccccccccccccccecececccceceeeeese 2 17 Electronic Immobilizer Operation PASS Key Iii ccccccccccceesssseeseeeeeceseneeeeaeees 2 18 Engine Air Cleaner Filter a n 5 19 Change Engine Oil Light cc ceeeeeeeee ee 3 37 Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp 3 34 Compartment Overview
5. The key can be used for the ignition and all locks The key has a bar coded key tag that the dealer retailer or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys Store this information in a safe place not in your vehicle Notice If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle you may have to damage the vehicle to get in Be sure you have spare keys If you are locked out of your vehicle contact Roadside Assistance See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 for more information Remote Keyless Entry RKE System If this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry RKE system it operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range try this
6. Warning Lights Gages and Indicators Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to the warning lights and gages could prevent injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle s functions Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to indicate a problem with the vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that explains what to do Follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running You will know how fast you are going how much fuel you are using and many other things you will need to drive safely and economically N A ao MPH 60 S kmh 129 7 r United States version shown Canada and Sport Model similar 3 25 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour mph and kilometers per hour km h Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven in either miles us
7. 2 Insert the key into the slot next to the rear door security lock label and turn it to the vertical position 3 Repeat the steps for the other lock Lockout Protection If you press the power door lock switch when the key is in the ignition and any door is open all the doors will lock and only the driver s door will unlock Be sure to remove the key from the ignition when locking your vehicle If the keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the doors and the key is in the ignition a chime will sound three times All passenger doors will lock but the driver s door will remain unlocked Liftgate A CAUTION It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or liftglass open because carbon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You cannot see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness and even death If you must drive with the liftgate open or if CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftgate or liftglass Make sure all other windows are shut Turn the fan on your climate control system to its highest speed and select the control setting that will force outside air into your vehicle See Climate Control System in the Index If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way See Engine Exhaust on page 2 35 To unlock the liftgate press the unlock button on t
8. Check the distance The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle Stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again Check the transmitter s battery See Battery Replacement later in this section If the transmitter is still not working correctly see your dealer retailer or a qualified technician for service Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter functions work up to 195 feet 60 m away from the vehicle There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 2 4 With Remote Start Shown Without Remote Start Similar Q Remote Vehicle Start For vehicles with this feature press to start the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 7 for additional information Lock Press to lock the doors and liftgate If enabled through the Driver Information Center DIC the parking lamps flash once to indicate locking has occurred If enabled through the DIC the horn chirps when is pressed again within five seconds See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 57 for additional information Pressing ag may arm the content theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 17
9. Windshield Washer A CAUTION In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision There is a button marked with the windshield washer symbol at the end of the windshield wiper lever Press this button to spray washer fluid on the windshield The wipers will run for a few cycles to clear the window and then either stop or return to your preset speed For more wash cycles press and hold the button longer Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper and rear wash buttons are located on the instrument panel above the audio system AJ Rear Wiper Press to turn the rear wiper on and off When the wiper is on it runs intermittently at a preset speed CJ Wash Press to spray washer fluid on the rear window The window wiper will also come on Release the button when enough fluid has been sprayed on the window The rear wiper will run a few more cycles after it is released If the rear wiper function was already on prior to pressing the wash button it stays on until the wiper button is pressed again The rear window washer uses the same fluid that is in the windshield washer reservoir See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 31 Cruise Control Cruise control lets a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator Cruise control does not work at speeds below 25 m
10. cceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 12 Coolant or reen elaine eae aide 5 23 Coolant Heater cesiones niaiso niini an aE 2 23 Coolant Temperature Gage eeeeeeeeeeeee 3 33 Coolant Temperature Warning Light 3 32 Cooling System ccceeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 22 Drive Belt Routing 0 c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 6 16 DAE E E E ETE 2 35 Olli EE EE E 5 15 Oil Life System reires eoria bene 5 18 Overheated Protection Operating Mode 5 30 Overheating serio ac morr see ed E ue 5 28 Reduced Power Light ceeeseeeeereeees 3 38 AMINO aparece AE E EAE EE titan eels 2 21 Entry Lighting as rele seen 3 16 Event Data Recorders cceeeeeeeeneeeeeee eee ees 7 18 Extender Safety Belt cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 1 30 Filter Engine Air Cleaner ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee ees 5 19 Finish Damage nics says ser s nen keen 5 95 Flashers Hazard Warning 225 monne leader 3 6 Flash to Pass cccecceccee eee eeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneteneneees 3 8 Flat TIE orenean la elller 5 75 Flat Tire Changing seiden 5 76 Flat Tire Storing esere inini nee EEES 5 85 Fluid Automatic Transmission cccececeeeeeeeeeenes 5 21 Power Steering ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeneeaees 5 30 Windshield Washer cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeneees 5 31 Fog Lamp FOG Eee fot SEES RR Mesctinte eae SENER SE 3 15 Fog Lamp CIME aendre lasse deler re 3 37 Folding Rear Seaterns i
11. cceeeeeeeees 3 97 Net CONVENIENCE cece c cece ec ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 2 48 New Vehicle Break In ccccceee eee eee eee eeeeees 2 19 Odometer a siescteccseweced E La ghee ces deeded 3 26 Odometer TD caieisecccceecsasieawedndctaneadcacadesanedsbes 3 26 Off Road Recovery arnar n e a 4 12 Oil Change Engine Oil Light eee 3 37 e E A A E A E EE 5 15 Engine Oil Life System eeeeeeeeeee neers 5 18 Pressure ILIQht acres rd a na 3 36 Older Children Restraints cccceeeeeeeeees 1 31 Online Owner Center 0c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 5 ONStaePNVACY dincctsestscoscgneeasnacetaneasnnsseeatances 7 19 OnStar System see OnStar Manual 2 39 Outlet Adjustment cc eceeeeeeeeee eee eeaeeaeeaes 3 23 Outlets Accessory Power succeer sone ence eeeeeeeeeeeee 3 18 Outside Convex Mirrors cceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 38 Power Mirrors ac estteud Ed ar ere ities 2 38 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode 5 30 Owner Checks and Services ceeeeeeeeeeee es 6 10 Owners Canadian c ccccceceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees ii Paint Damage lt itsiviseicdalesvieeneigeeecitiveaeeeidi atte 5 95 Park SHUT MO isdie eate iadi vaea 2 32 Shifting QUT OF tesxisaesaecieeeslieiedda a vans 2 33 Parking Over Things That Burn ccceseeeeeeeeeee tenes 2 34 Parking Br ke 2550 somre dene daieieess acca s
12. A Unlock Press once to unlock the driver door If Mis pressed again within five seconds all remaining doors and the liftgate unlock The interior lamps come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on If enabled through the DIC the parking lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 57 Pressing A on the RKE transmitter disarms the content theft deterrent system See Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 17 amp Vehicle Locator Panic Alarm Press and release to locate the vehicle The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds three times Press and hold 2 for more than two seconds to activate the panic alarm The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to ON RUN or J is pressed again The ignition must be in LOCK OFF for the panic alarm to work The RKE transmitter is used to arm disarm the content theft deterrent system The theft deterrent system can be programmed to three different modes See Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 17 If you accidentally set off the alarm when entering or exiting the vehicle press or A once or X twice to turn it off Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will work If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer retailer When the r
13. Root Directory The root directory of the CD R or CD RW is treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed audio files the directory displays as F1 ROOT All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders However playlists Px are always accessed before root folders or files Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files The empty folder does not display No Folder When the CD contains only compressed files the files are located under the root folder The next and previous folder functions are not displayed on a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists When displaying the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT When the CD contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files are located under the root folder The folder down and the folder up buttons search playlists Px first and then go to the root folder When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT 3 87 Order of Play Tracks recorded to the CD R or CD RW are played in the following order Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist
14. blll DEFOR ag Ch 1 PRRARBRARB Fuses Usage Compass 5 98 Fuses Usage e meo Module Remote Function Actuator 17 Radio 18 Cluster 19 Ignition Switch 20 Body Control Module 21 Communications Integration Module 22 Center High Mounted Stoplamp Dimmer Interior Lights Relays RAP RLY net e l Rear Defogger Relay Retained Accessory Power Relay Circuit Breakers PWR WNDW_ Power Windows PWR SEATS EMPTY Empty Engine Compartment Fuse Block The engine compartment fuse block is located on the driver side of the engine compartment See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on location To remove the fuse block cover release the rear of the cover first by unlocking both of the tabs in the back Then lift the cover off Do not lift the front of the cover until the tabs at the rear have been unlocked To reinstall fit together the tabs located on the front of the cover and push down on the cover until the tabs on the rear of the cover click into place Notice Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it Always keep the covers on any electrical component 5 99 5 100 uia v D 3 4 5 Hs OS oo e D CT Ea eal EA 26 er HERH Ele Eel LS SE Cal feed jj cot ooties co foo SOFIA KO BjjAlin RHDH E l fel a gt
15. 4 Locate the jack and wheel wrench which are located on the driver s side of the rear cargo area behind an access door Pull out the access door to reach them 5 78 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire Take off the wheel cover or center cap if the vehicle has one to reach the wheel bolts 1 Do a safety check before proceeding See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 76 for more information 2 Loosen all five plastic caps by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise Do not try to remove S plastic caps from the RS cover or center cap 3 Pull the cover or center cap away from the wheel Store the wheel cover in the cargo area until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced 4 Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts Do not remove them yet 5 Attach the wheel wrench to the jack bolt head and turn the wheel wrench clockwise That will raise the lift head a little 6 Place the jack near the flat tire Notice Make sure that the jack lift head is in the correct position or you may damage your vehicle The repairs would not be covered by your warranty 5 79 7 Find the arrow on the plastic lower body panel With the jack head positioned correctly on the metal Position the jack head under the metal jacking jacking flange it should look like this underneath flange and not the plastic lower body panel the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle using the plastic lower body p
16. 4 NEN v S Pa Nouv ogee Passenger P Metric Tire Example 5 52 A Tire Size The tire size is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail B TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines C DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards D Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT Department of Transportation code is the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture E Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread F Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance For more information see Unifo
17. 5 1 Service ose ceccecc eee eec eee eeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeueenees 5 3 FUG E E E E EE E EEES 5 5 Checking Things Under the Hood _ 5 10 All Wheel Drive oo cece cc ccc ec cec eee ee eee eeeen eens 5 41 Headlamp Aiming ecceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 5 43 Bulb Replacement ou ccc cc cece cece cee eeeeee eee 5 44 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement _ 5 49 MES osioon ERE NE EET ERE FJER 5 51 Appearance Care oo eeeeccecceceeeceeeeueeeeenes 5 88 Vehicle Identification oo cee ec cee ece eee ee ee 5 96 Electrical System oo eee cece eee eeeeeee een eee ees 5 96 Capacities and Specifications eee 5 103 Maintenance Schedule 00 cccscesseesseeseeeeees 6 1 Maintenance Schedule ccc cee ee eee ee eee 6 2 Customer Assistance Information 7 1 Customer Assistance and Information _ 7 2 Reporting Safety Defects 1 7 16 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy _ 7 18 Tato gt Gap ene ae EE E Pe oe ee 1 rger CHEVROLET GENERAL MOTORS GM the GM Emblem CHEVROLET the CHEVROLET Emblem and the name EQUINOX are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed GM reserves the right to make changes after that time without notice For vehicles first sold in Canada substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for Chevrolet Motor Divisio
18. A CAUTION If something is between an occupant and an airbag the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down through any door or window opening If you do the path of an inflating roof rail airbag will be blocked 1 59 When Should an Airbag Inflate Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver s or right front passenger s head and chest However they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling It depends largely on what you hit the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds For example If the vehicle hits a stationary object the airbags could inflate at a d
19. If the radio has XM the CAT button can be used to find XM stations when the radio is in the XM mode CAT Category To find XM channels within a desired category perform the following 1 Press the BAND button until the XM frequency is displayed Press the CAT button to display the category tabs on the radio display Continue pressing the CAT button until the desired category name displays Depending on the radio another way to navigate the category list is to press the lt I REV button or the gt gt FWD button 2 Press either of the two buttons below the desired category tab to immediately tune to the first XM station associated with that category 3 Turn the Jd knob press the buttons below the right or left arrows displayed or press the Seek arrows to go to the previous or to the next XM station within the selected category 4 To exit the category search mode press the FAV button or BAND button to display the favorites again Undesired XM categories can be removed through the setup menu To remove an undesired category perform the following 1 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT tab 3 Turn the dd knob to display the category to be removed 4 Press the pushbutton located under the Remove tab until the category name along with the word Removed displays 5 Repeat the steps to remove more categories Removed categories can be res
20. Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires If it is not there and the engine backfires you could be burned Do not drive with it off and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner filter off Notice If the air cleaner filter is off a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into the engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you are driving Automatic Transmission Fluid It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss If a leak occurs take your vehicle to the dealer retailer and have it repaired as soon as possible Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Additional Required Services on page 6 7 and be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Notice Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 For the 3 6L engine the transmission fluid will not reach the end of the dipstick unless the transmission is at operating temperature If you need to check the transmission fluid level please tak
21. e e a ao ale Bin Ca SIS 31 5 mall Q N Fuses J Usse 10 Engine Control Module Spare Sp Transmission Control Module Battery Trailer Park Lamp Front Wiper Driver Side Trailer Stoplamp Turn Signal Engine Control Module Battery Not Used All Wheel Drive Regulated Voltage Control Turn Signal Fuel Pump 5 101 58 Passenger Side Trailer Stoplamp Turn Signal Driver Side Trailer Stoplamp 59 Turn Signal When changing relays observe the location of the notch on the old relay Install new relays with the notch in the same location 31 Ignition Main 31 Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch 5 102 Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 for more information For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge SEDs amount see the refrigerant caution label located Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a under the hood See your dealer for more information Cooling System 3 4L V6 Engine 3 6L V6 Engine Engine Oil with Filter 3 4L V6 Engine 3 6L V6 Engine 5 103 All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this manual Recheck fluid level after filling Engine Specifications Frans win ede Spark Plug Gap 0 040 in 1 01 mm 5 104 Section 6 Maintenance S
22. 4 NOTES 2 50 Section 3 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview 008 3 4 Climate Controls cccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneee ees 3 19 Hazard Warning Flashers ceecee 3 6 Climate Control System cceeeeeeeeee eee eenes 3 19 aloa a EE E AE E sicaaarerecesanes 3 6 Outlet AdjUStMent i is sr serne bedet sians 3 23 TH WINGS oiiire gen a ers 3 6 Passenger Compartment Air Filter 3 23 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever 1 3 7 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 24 Turn and Lane Change Signals sne 3 7 Instrument Panel Cluster ee 3 25 Headlamp High Low Beam Changer 3 8 Speedometer and Odometer ccceceeee 3 26 Flash to Pass Geen 3 8 Trip Odometer iaaa 3 26 Windshield Wipers ssssssssssssererereererrrrrrrne 3 8 Tachometer rieren niare areia 3 26 Windshield Washer csccceseeesseeeseeees 3 9 Safety Belt Reminders 0 cc0cccccceseeeseeeeees 3 27 Rear Window Wiper Washer ss 3 10 Airbag Readiness Light 1 3 28 Cruise Controls sn and ad He raden 3 10 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator W1 1 1 3 29 Headlamps DEE 3 13 Charging System Light see 3 30 Headlamps on Reminder asarana aiena 3 13 Brake System Warning Light 3 30 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 1 3 14 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light 3 31 Automatic Headlamp System
23. Doing so can reduce your visibility Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle e When you are being passed ease to the right Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems brakes steering and acceleration do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always possible The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid the wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin Remember Any traction control system helps avoid only the acceleration skid If the traction system is off then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 7 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 If the vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If y
24. If it states that it should not be used on plastic parts do not use it on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be covered by the warranty Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight Use a car washing soap Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives as they can damage the paint metal or plastic on the vehicle Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer Follow all manufacturers directions regarding correct product usage necessary safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product 5 91 Rinse the vehicle well before washing and after to remove all cleaning agents completely If they are allowed to dry on the surface they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle Avoid using high pressure washes closer than 12 inches 30 cm to the surface of the vehicle Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 91 5 92 Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the p
25. If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD R or CD RW in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD R or CD RW starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play the track number and song title displays amp EJECT Press to eject CD R s or CD RW s To eject the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing press and release this button A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD R or CD RW can be removed If the CD R is not removed after several seconds the CD R or CD RW automatically pulls back into the player and begins playing For the Six Disc CD player press and hold this button for two seconds to eject all discs A Tune Turn to select MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW currently playing K SEEK Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current MP3 WMA file if more than ten seconds have played Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3 WMA file If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through MP3 WMA files on the CD lt 5 Previous Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder tab to go to the first track in the previous folder gt Next Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder tab to go to the first track in the next folder
26. Press this button to go to the beginning of the next chapter or track This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews Fast Reverse Press this button to fast reverse the DVD or CD To stop fast reversing a DVD video press the play pause button To stop fast reversing a DVD audio or CD release the fast reverse button This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews 3 114 gt gt Fast Forward Press this button to fast forward the DVD or CD To stop fast forwarding a DVD video press the play pause button To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio or CD release the fast forward button This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews 2 Audio Press this button to change audio tracks on DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing The format and content of this function vary for each disc Subtitles Press this button to turn ON OFF subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function vary for each disc AUX Auxiliary Press this button to switch the system between the DVD player and an auxiliary source Camera Press this button to change camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function vary for each disc 1 through 0 Numeric Keypad The numeric k
27. When the last track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of the first playlist Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder When the last track of the last folder has played play continues from the first track of the first folder When play enters a new folder the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless the folder mode was chosen as the default display The new track name displays File System and Naming The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name without the extension Such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename displays 3 88 Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however they cannot be edited using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files Playing an MP3 WMA Insert a CD R or CD RW partway into the slot Single CD Player or press the XS7 button and wait for the message to insert disc Six Disc CD Player label side up The player pulls it in and the CD R or CD RW should begin playing
28. When you take your foot off the pedal the vehicle slows down to the cruise control speed that was set earlier Using Cruise Control on Hills How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon the vehicle s speed load and the steepness of the hills While going up steep hills you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle s speed While going downhill you might have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle at a lower speed However when the brakes are applied the cruise control turns off Ending Cruise Control There are three ways to end cruise control Step lightly on the brake pedal Press the button to turn off the cruise control system Press the amp button When cruise control disengages the cruise symbol in the instrument panel cluster goes out Erasing Speed Memory The cruise control set speed memory is erased when the cruise control or the ignition is turned off Headlamps The exterior lamp control is located on the turn signal multifunction lever Exterior Lamp Control Turn the control with this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps The exterior lamp control has the following positions AUTO Off Automatic Headlamps Automatic mode turns the exterior lamps on and off depending upon how much light is available outside of the vehicle 700 Parking Lamps Turns on the parking lamps together with the following Sidemarker Lam
29. are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do and be ready In addition Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you Focus on the task of driving Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or possible death These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunk Driving A CAUTION Drinking and then driving is very dangerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you are with a group designate a driver who will not drink Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle judgment muscular coordination vision and attentiveness Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years more than 17 000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol with about 250 000 people injured For persons under 21 it is against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psychological and developmental rea
30. could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system When the brake fluid falls to a low level the brake warning light comes on See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 30 What to Add Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir A CAUTION With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic system the brakes might not work well This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid Notice Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake hydraulic system parts For example just a few drops of mineral based oil such as engine oil in the brake hydraulic system can damage brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle s painted surfaces the paint finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle If you do wash it off immediately See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 91 5 33 Brake Wear This vehicle has disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is movin
31. going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down other wet weather driving tips include Allow extra following distance Pass with caution Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled e Have good tires with proper tread depth See Tires on page 5 51 Turn off cruise control Before Leaving on a Long Trip To prepare your vehicle for a long trip consider having it serviced by your dealer retailer before departing Things to check on your own include e Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir full Windows clean inside and outside e Wiper Blades In good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids All levels checked Lamps Do they all work and are lenses clean Tires Are treads good Are tires inflated to recommended pressure Weather and Maps Safe to travel Have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings while driving If you become tired or sleepy find a safe place to park your vehicle and rest Other driving tips include Keep the vehicle well ventilated Keep interior temperature cool Keep your eyes moving scan the road ahead and to the sides Check the rearview mirror and vehic
32. information 3 56 TRACTION CONTROL OFF This message displays when the Traction Control System TCS turns off See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 7 for more information This message only displays while the ignition is in ON RUN and disappears after 10 seconds unless it is acknowledged or an urgent warning appears Any of the following conditions may cause the TCS to turn off The TCS is turned off by pressing the traction control button See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 7 for more information The battery is low There is a TCS failure See your dealer retailer for service TRACTION CONTROL ON This message displays when the Traction Control System TCS turns on See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 7 for more information TURN SIGNAL ON This message displays as a reminder to turn off the turn signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about 0 75 mile 1 2 km with a turn signal on See Turn Signal Multifunction Lever on page 3 7 This message displays and a chime sounds only when the ignition is in ON RUN The message will not disappear until the turn signal is manually turned off or a turn is completed DIC Vehicle Personalization Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting All of the personalization options may not be available on your vehicle Only the options available will be displayed on th
33. lt name tag gt Please say yes or no Ifthe name tag is correct say Yes to delete the name tag The system responds with OK deleting lt name tag gt returning to the main menu Ifthe name tag is incorrect say No The system responds with No OK let s try again please say the name tag Using the Delete All Name Tags Command The delete all name tags command deletes all stored phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar if present To use the delete all name tags command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Delete all name tags The system responds with You are about to delete all name tags stored in your phone directory and your route destination directory Are you sure you want to do this Please say yes or no e Say Yes to delete all name tags Say No to cancel the function and return to the main menu Making a Call Calls can be made using the following commands Dial Digit Dial Call e Re dial Using the Dial Command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Dial The system responds with Dial using lt phone name gt Number please followed by a tone 3 Say the entire number without pausing e If the system recognizes the number it responds with OK Dialing and dials the numb
34. the engine does not connect with the wheels To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving use N Neutral only 2 28 A CAUTION Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed Notice Shifting out of P Park or N Neutral with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle D Drive This position is for normal driving It provides the best fuel economy If the vehicle needs more power for passing and it is Going less than 35 mph 55 km h push the accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator pedal all the way down The vehicle will shift down to the next gear and have more power Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding see Skidding under Loss of Control on page 4 12 Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hi
35. the vehicle before it can be used See the cell phone manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the cell phone If a Bluetooth phone is not connected calls will be made using OnStar Hands Free Calling if available Refer to the OnStar owner s guide for more information 3 98 Pairing Information Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in vehicle Bluetooth system The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving The in vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links with the first available paired cell phone in the order the phone was paired Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the in vehicle Bluetooth system at a time Pairing should only need to be completed once unless changes to the pairing information have been made or the phone is deleted To link to a different paired phone see Linking to a Different Phone later in this section Pairing a Phone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone Say Pair The system responds with instructions and a four digit PIN number The PIN number will be used in Step 4 Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will be paired to the vehicle Reference the cell phone manufacturers user guide for information on this process Locate the device named
36. to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle Tire and Loading Information Label M AT ON REAR The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX Aaa or A Ibs SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Label Example A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle s center pillar B pillar With the driver s door open you will find the label attached below the door lock post striker 4 22 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x The tire and loading information label lists the number of occupant seating positions A and the maximum vehicle capacity weight B in kilograms and pounds The vehicle capacity weight includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options The Tire and Loading Information label also lists the tire size of the original equipment tires C and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures D For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5 51 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 58 There is also important loading information on the Certification Tire label It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axles See Certification Tire Label later in this section Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and
37. will cancel the recirculation mode Recirculation Press to turn the recirculation mode on An indicator light comes on to show recirculation is on The air inside the vehicle will be recirculated through the climate control system and the vehicle not from outside the vehicle It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle or to help cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly Avoid using the recirculation mode during high periods of humidity and cool outside temperatures since this may result in increased window fogging If window fogging is experienced select the defrost mode Recirculation mode is not available in floor defog or defrost modes and will shut off automatically and change to outside air If the button is selected in these modes the indicator will flash This helps prevent window fogging and moisture building up within the cabin 3 21 Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window The rear window defogger only works when the ignition is in ON RUN QW Rear Window Defogger Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off An indicator light comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on The rear window defogger stays on for about 10 minutes if the vehicle remains at slower vehicle speeds or until the button is pressed or the ignition is turned to ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF If turned on again the defogger only
38. 2 Turn the ignition to LOCK OFF 3 Firmly set the parking brake 4 Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle 5 Turn the ignition to ACC ACCESSORY Shift the transmission to N Neutral D 4 29 7 To prevent the battery from draining while the vehicle is being towed remove the 50 amp BATT1 fuse from the engine compartment fuse block and store ina safe location See Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 5 99 8 Release the parking brake Notice If the vehicle is towed without performing each of the steps listed under Dinghy Towing the automatic transmission could be damaged Be sure to follow all steps of the dinghy towing procedure prior to and after towing the vehicle Notice If 65 mph 105 km h is exceeded while towing the vehicle it could be damaged Never exceed 65 mph 105 km h while towing the vehicle Once the destination has been reached 1 Set the parking brake 2 Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuse to the engine compartment fuse block 3 Shift the transmission to P Park turn the ignition to LOCK OFF and remove the key from the ignition 4 Release the parking brake Notice Do not tow a vehicle with the front drive wheels on the ground if one of the front tires is a compact spare tire Towing with two different tire sizes on the front of the vehicle can cause severe damage to the transmission 4 30 Dolly Towing Front Wheel Drive Vehicles with a 5 speed Transmission
39. 84 16 Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown 17 Lower the jack all the way and remove the jack from under the vehicle 18 Tighten the wheel nuts firmly with the wheel wrench When reinstalling the wheel cover or center cap on the full size tire tighten all five plastic caps hand snug with the aid of the wheel wrench and tighten them with the wheel wrench an additional one quarter of a turn Notice Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle s compact spare If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare the cover or the spare could be damaged 3 Install the jack in the left side panel of cargo area and secure with the wing bolt Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools A CAUTION Storing a jack a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury In a sudden stop or collision loose equipment could strike someone Store all these in the proper place 4 Remove the wheel stow rod from the left side of the floor compartment To store the flat or spare tire and tools 1 Place the wheel wrench into the bag 2 Use the hook and loop fastener straps to secure the bag to the fully collapsed jack 5 85 6 Remove the cap if your vehicle has one from the center of the load floor Position the rod through the hole Replace the rear compartment load floor over the wheel stow rod through the hole in the floor 7 Place the flat or damage
40. ABS 4 5 Warning LIQ it care ianei 3 31 Appearance Care Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 5 94 Care of Safety Belts u sssseeeeeeeererernee 5 91 Chemical Paint Spotting sssseeererrreee 5 95 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 5 92 Fabric Carpet W W W W sseseseeeerererenee renerne renerne 5 89 Finish Cale ts asernes banes 5 92 Finish DAMAGE tc catcsecnvetecteematacuncenseceearedert 5 95 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic SUITACES s22t aceirtioieedestesielviteernt 5 90 Interior Cleaning 0 eeeeeee eee eee eee eeee eee een teers 5 88 Leather sesiooni nna E e Een 5 90 Sheet Metal Damage eceeeeeeeeeeeeen eens 5 95 TOS eneee E E E mses 5 94 Underbody Maintenance u sssesseereeernernee 5 95 Washing Your Vehicle eeeeeeeeeeeeeen tees 5 91 Weatherstrips a s 2 2 2edsccavitetevaecnantaemectaatnoses 5 91 Windshield and Wiper Blades 00 5 93 ASAE errare o ne E a OEA 3 18 Assistance Program Roadside 200 7 7 Audio System arne AAEN AE s DRE 3 64 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 1 1 1 1 1 3 117 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual cece 3 97 Setting the ClOCk eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 3 65 Audio System S cceceeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeaeeneeeees 3 67 Audio Systems Radio Reception eceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeee
41. Air is directed to the floor outlets with some air directed to the windshield When this mode is selected the system turns the recirculation mode off Recirculation mode cannot be selected while in floor mode This helps to prevent window fogging N Defog This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture Air is directed to the windshield side window outlets and floor outlets In this mode the system turns the recirculation mode off and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside air is at or below freezing Recirculation mode cannot be selected while in defog mode This helps prevent window fogging To defog the windows faster turn the temperature knob clockwise to the warmest setting W Defrost This mode removes fog or frost from the windshield more quickly Air is directed to the windshield with some air directed to the side window outlets and the floor outlets In this mode the system turns the recirculation mode off and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside air is at or below freezing Recirculation mode cannot be selected while in defrost mode This helps prevent window fogging To defrost the windows faster turn the temperature knob clockwise to the warmest setting For best results clear all snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting 3 20 Air Conditioning Air Conditioning Press to turn the air conditioning system on or off An indicator light comes on to show tha
42. Audio Video A V Jacks for more information D Power Press to turn the radio on or off Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume Press and hold for more than two seconds turns off the entire radio and Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system and starts the parental control feature which prevents the rear seat occupant from operating the Rear Seat Audio RSA system or remote control A lock symbol appears next to the clock display The parental control feature remains on until a subsequent press and hold of the power button is performed more than two seconds or until the driver turns the ignition off and exits the vehicle A Tune Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD to manually tune a radio station or to change clock or date settings while in the clock or date setting mode See the information given earlier in this section specific to the radio CD and the DVD Also see Setting the Clock on page 3 65 for setting the clock and date K SEEK Previous Track Chapter Press to return to the start of the current track or chapter Press again to go to the previous track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews SEEK Next Track Chapter Press to go to the next track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews lt lt REV Fast Reverse Press to fast reverse the
43. Basse neea E NEA 3 8 FOG LAMP sie 8 cccesrtadiceec ietheaneessaemeneatemncas Gates 3 37 Gate Ajar sin snarere DA neces 3 40 Highbeam OM silvcesiisivesiceielsst naa babe eal 3 38 High Low Beam Changer eseese 3 8 Low Fuel Warming sie cesccceciscnenseveeesiees est eee 3 41 Oil PRESSURE siriasi munisi ania aana ena ladaai dane 3 36 On Remide cc ices sekten cascencecnmmesheweanendne anes 3 13 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 3 29 Reduced Engine Power eseeeeeeeee eens 3 38 Safety Belt Reminders ceeeeeneeeeeeeee 3 27 SEGUMU adara enira E EE EO a e e 3 37 Service All Wheel Drive u sssseeererereererernee 3 39 Service Vehicle SOON n 3 40 Tire POSSUNGY anria enenda onea 3 33 Traction Control System TCS Warning 3 32 Loading Your Vehicle ceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 21 Locks Delayed LOCKING scxpssccncastecaucceawnareancaanetbanniar 2 10 DOON reae esre a OEA E E 2 10 Lockout Protection cccccceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaees 2 12 Power Door ccccecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeneneeneeneenees 2 10 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 11 Rear Door Security LOCKS 0eeeeeeeeeee ees 2 11 Loss Of COntrol osc csiccscsocudies deincidine das exch Soateenihes Hoban 4 12 Low Fuel Warning Light a e 3 41 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 1 42 Luggage Carrion udsender seerne 2 43 Lumbar Manual Controls ccccceceec
44. General Motors in the list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number that was provided in Step 3 The system prompts for a name for the phone Use a name that best describes the phone This name will be used to indicate which phone is connected The system then confirms the name provided The system responds with lt Phone name gt has been successfully paired after the pairing process is complete Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to be paired Listing All Paired and Connected Phones 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone Say List The system lists all the paired Bluetooth devices If a phone is connected to the vehicle the system will say Is connected after the connected phone Deleting a Paired Phone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone Say Delete The system asks which phone to delete followed by a tone Say the name of the phone to be deleted If the phone name is unknown use the List command for a list of all paired phones The system responds with Would you like to delete
45. Get It Out 4 21 Traction Control System TCS o ae 4 7 Loading the Vehicle release eres 4 21 All Wheel Drive AWD System sssssssssseee 4 9 TOWING secs sorger ecnatecchn nc un eia aaia 4 27 SIEEN ganen ses ei a aa Ea AEE 4 10 Towing Your Vehicle css 4 27 Off Road Recovery 1 0 eee 4 12 Recreational Vehicle Towing 1 4 27 Passing PRES RE NE eed ERR RnRe eRe dee DSE ENEDES ENES 4 12 Towing SY TANG cise ce eel cae eae on TT eee le 4 34 Loss of Control ror reel sateen sey 4 12 Your Driving the Road and Defensive Driving the Vehicle Defensive driving means always expect the unexpected The first step in driving defensively is to 5 wear your safety belt See Safety Belts They Are for Driving habits can affect fuel mileage Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time When road and weather conditions are appropriate use cruise control if equipped Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require Keep vehicle tires properly inflated Combine several trips into a single trip Replace the vehicle s tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire s sidewall near the size Follow recommended scheduled maintenance A CAUTION Assume that other road users pedestrians bicyclists and other drivers
46. Oil on page 5 15 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information Acknowledging this message will not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING display That must be done at the OIL LIFE screen under the vehicle information menu See OIL LIFE under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 42 and Engine Oil Life System on page 5 18 for more information 3 50 CHECK TIRE PRESSURE This message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle s tires needs to be checked This message also displays LEFT FRONT RIGHT FRNT Front LEFT REAR or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to be checked You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time To read the other messages that may have been sent at the same time press the set reset button If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC stop as soon as you can Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label See Tires on page 5 51 Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 58 The DIC also shows the tire pressure values See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 42 If the tire pressure is low the low tire pressure warning light comes on See Tire Pressure Light on page 3 33 DRIVER DOOR OPEN This message displays when the driver door is not closed properly Close the door completely ENGINE HOT A C Air Conditioning OFF This message displays when the engine coolant becomes ho
47. RW and begins playing MP3 WMA files from that album To exit music navigator mode press the pushbutton below the Back tab to return to normal MP3 WMA playback BAND Press to listen to the radio when a CD ora DVD is playing The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text tab and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and does not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front AUX and Rear AUX if available See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 108 Rear Seat Entertainment System Audio Video A V Jacks for more information If a MP3 WMA is inserted into top DVD slot the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD tracks only through the remote control 3 95 XM Radio Messag
48. See footnote g 3 6L V6 Engine Only Check automatic transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed Lubricate body components See footnote f Fe Inspect throttle system See footnote j ee Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service I or II after the indicated miles kilometers shown for each item Additional Required Services 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 40000 80 000 KELO 000 HULL 000 2009 000 IGLO 000 Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks oe Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components Replace engine air cleaner filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 19 ee automatic transmission fluid severe service See footnote h Change ae transmission fluid normal service Change transfer case fluid severe service See footnote n Change transfer case fluid normal service See footnote 0 Additional Required Services cont d oe 25 000 50 000 75 000 100 000 125 000 150 000 Service and Miles Kilometers 407900 80000 120 000 160 000 200 000 240 000 Engine cooling system service or every five years whichever occurs first An Emission Control Service See footnote i Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service See footnote m Maintenance Footnotes a Visually inspect brake lines
49. This instrument panel cluster light comes on after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed 1 Press the on off button to turn cruise control on 2 Get up to the desired speed 3 Press the SET button and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal Resuming a Set Speed If the cruise control is at a set speed and the brakes are applied this disengages the cruise control The instrument panel cluster light also goes out indicating cruise is no longer engaged To return to the previously set speed it does not need to be reset Once the vehicle is going about 25 mph 40 km h or more press RES The vehicle goes back to the previous set speed and stays there Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed Press and hold the RES button until the desired speed is reached then release it To increase vehicle speed in small amounts press the RES button Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control If the cruise control system is already engaged Press and hold the SET button until the desired lower speed is reached then release it To slow down in small amounts briefly press SET Each time this is done the vehicle goes about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle s speed
50. This is accomplished by selectively applying any one of the vehicle s brakes and reducing power The StabiliTrak system comes on automatically whenever the vehicle is started The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may be displayed in the Driver Information Center DIC and the StabiliTrak Traction Control System TCS warning light will come on the instrument panel cluster after first driving the vehicle and exceeding 30 mph 48 km h for 30 seconds The StabiliTrak system is off until the light has turned off This could take up to 15 minutes See D C Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 for more information A ee The StabiliTrak TCS warning light on the instrument panel cluster will flash when the system is operating The system may be heard or felt while it is working This is normal This light may also come on after extended heavy braking indicating the brakes have become too hot to limit wheel spin StabiliTrak can be turned off using the StabiliTrak TCS control button f ee To disable StabiliTrak press and hold the traction control button until the StabiliTrak TCS warning light comes on the instrument panel StabiliTrak can be activated again by pressing the StabiliTrak TCS button The SERVICE STABILITRAK message will be displayed and the StabiliTrak TCS warning light on the instrument panel cluster will come on if there is a problem with the system When this light and the SERVICE STABILITRAK message are on the
51. a CD Single CD Player Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing Playing a CD s Six Disc CD Player LOAD 7 Press to load CDs into the CD player This CD player holds up to six CDs To insert one CD do the following 1 Press and release the 7 button 2 Wait for the message to insert the disc 3 Load a CD Insert the CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls the CD in To insert multiple CDs do the following 1 Press and hold the 7 button for two seconds A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays 2 Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert the discs The CD player takes up to six CDs 3 Press the 7 button again to cancel loading more CDs 3 74 If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source When a CD is inserted the CD symbol appears on the CD As each new track starts to play the track number displays The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner Care of CDs If playing a CD the sound quality can be reduced due to CD quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD has been handled Handle
52. a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 17 A CAUTION For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected an airbag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the airbag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so 1 68 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Q Is there anything might add to or change about the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly A Yes If you add things that change the vehicle s frame bumper system height front end or side sheet metal they may keep the airbag system from working properly Changing or moving any parts of the front seats safety belts the airbag sensing and diagnostic module steering wheel instrument panel roof rail airbag modules ceiling headliner or pillar garnish trim overhead console front sensors side impact sensors rollover sensor module or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system In addition the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position which includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non GM covers uphols
53. an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam can be seen or heard the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle Climbs a long hill on a hot day Stops after high speed driving Idles for long periods in traffic Tows a trailer If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam 1 Turn the air conditioner off 2 Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed Open the windows as necessary 3 If in a traffic jam try to minimize engine load Shift to N Neutral otherwise shift to the highest gear while driving 5 29 If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays the vehicle can be driven Continue to drive the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes Keep a safe vehicle distance from the car in front of you If the warning does not come back on continue to drive normally If the warning continues pull over stop and park the vehicle right away If there is no sign of steam idle the engine for three minutes while parked If the warning is still displayed turn off the engine until it cools down Also see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode later in this section Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode This emergency operating mode lets the vehicle be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation If an overheated engine condi
54. anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system Make sure that a LATCH compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual When installing a child restraint with a top tether you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint A child restraint must never be installed using only the top tether and anchor In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Lower anchors A are metal bars built into the vehicle A top tether A C anchors the top of the child restraint There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating to the vehicle A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle position that will accommodate a child restraint with The top tether attachment B on the child restraint lower attachments B connects to the top tet
55. and delivery date of the vehicle Description of the problem Coverage Services are provided up to 5 years 100 000 miles 160 000 km whichever comes first In the U S anyone driving the vehicle is covered In Canada a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too often or the same type of claim is made many times Services Provided Emergency Fuel Delivery Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station Lock Out Service Service is provided to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out A remote unlock may be available if you have OnStar For security reasons the driver must present identification before this service is given Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for warranty service or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven Assistance is also given when the vehicle is stuck in the sand mud or snow Flat Tire Change Service is provided to change a flat tire with the spare tire The spare tire if equipped mu
56. and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect other brake parts including calipers parking brake etc Check parking brake adjustment b Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts or signs of wear Visually check constant velocity joints rubber boots and axle seals for leaks With 3 4L V6 engine Inspect electric power steering cables for proper hook up binding cracks chafing etc With 3 6L V6 engine Inspect hydraulic power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc 6 8 c Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace with genuine parts as needed To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year d Inspect wiper blades for wear cracking or contamination Clean the windshield and wiper blades if contaminated Replace wiper blades that are worn or damaged See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5 49 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 5 93 for more information e Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety belt assemblies are working properly Look for any other loos
57. are on this light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on Flash to Pass This feature lets you use your high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass To flash the high beams from low beam pull the turn signal multifunction lever all the way towards you Then release it Windshield Wipers The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of the steering column Move the lever to the following positions High Speed For steady wiping at high speed GERD Low Speed For steady wiping at low speed Vv Delay Sets a delay between wipes f Delay Adjustment Move the lever to the delay position to choose a delayed wiping cycle Turn the intermittent adjust band down for a longer delay or up for a shorter delay O Off Turns off the windshield wipers K Mist Move the lever all the way down to mist and release for a single wiping cycle The windshield wipers stop after one wipe and the lever returns to its starting position Hold the lever on mist longer for more wipes Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If they are frozen to the windshield gently loosen or thaw them If the blades do become damaged install new blades or blade inserts See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5 49 Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload
58. as airbag initiators seat belt pretensioners and lithium batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters may contain perchlorate materials Special handling may be necessary For additional information see www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Doing Your Own Service Work A CAUTION You can be injured and the vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it Be sure you have sufficient knowledge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before attempting any vehicle maintenance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If the wrong fasteners are used parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt If doing some of your own service work use the proper service manual It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can To order the proper service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 17 This vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to do your own service work see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 68 Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed See Maintenance Record on page 6 17 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the airflow around it This can cause wind noise and
59. assist customers who are deaf hard of hearing or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones TTYs Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center Any TTY user in the U S can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing 1 800 833 CHEV 2438 TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830 Customer Assistance Offices Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll free number for assistance However if a customer wishes to write or e mail Chevrolet the letter should be addressed to United States Customer Assistance Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33170 Detroit MI 48232 5170 Chevrolet com 1 800 222 1020 1 800 833 2438 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 CHEV USA 243 8872 From Puerto Rico 1 800 496 9992 English 1 800 496 9993 Spanish From U S Virgin Islands 1 800 496 9994 Canada Customer Assistance General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 gmcanada com 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French 1 800 263 3830 For Text Telephone devices TTYs Roadside Assistance 1 800 268 6800 Overseas Customer Assistance Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit Mexico Central America and Caribbean Islands Countries Except Puerto Rico and U S Virgin Islands Customer Assistance General Motors de Mex
60. back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 63 for additional information If your child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 42 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 42 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint 1 Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger s frontal airbag the off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 29 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shou
61. belt continues to tighten Buckle any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock if your vehicle has one after the child restraint has been installed Notice Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicle s safety belts This may damage these parts If necessary move buckled safety belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt buckled This could damage the safety belt or the seat Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its stowed position before folding the seat anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the restraints Some restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top tether 1 Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual 1 1 Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position 1 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 1 3 Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors 2 If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached attach and tighten the top tether to the top te
62. between the vehicle and the trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer Follow the manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes A loaded trailer that weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 450 kg needs to have its own brake system that is adequate for the weight of the trailer Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed adjusted and maintained properly Because the vehicle has StabiliTrak do not try to tap into the vehicle s hydraulic brake system If you do both brake systems will not work well or at all 4 37 Driving with a Trailer A CAUTION When towing a trailer exhaust gases may collect at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate trunk hatch or rear most window is open Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death To maximize safety when towing a trailer Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks and make necessary repairs before starting a trip Never drive with the liftgate trunk hatch or rear most win
63. can affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance Check with your dealer retailer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of this vehicle To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN shows the code letter or number that identifies the vehicle s engine The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel See Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 5 96 Gasoline Octane If the vehicle has the 3 4L V6 engine VIN Code F use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher If the octane rating is less than 87 you might notice an audible knocking noise when you drive commonly referred to as spark knock If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking the engine needs service If the vehicle has the 3 6L V6 engine VIN Code 7 use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher For best performance or trailer towing you could choose to use middle grade 89 octane unleaded gasoline If the octane rating is less than 87 you might notice an audible knocking noise when you drive commonly referred to as spar
64. can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park See Shifting Into Park on page 2 32 If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 34 Make sure the shift lever is fully in P Park before starting the engine The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You must fully apply the brake pedal and then press the shift lever button before you can shift from P Park when the ignition is in ON RUN 2 27 If you cannot shift out of P Park ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all way into P Park as you maintain brake application Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another gear See Shifting Out of Park on page 2 33 R Reverse Use this gear to back up Notice Shifting to R Reverse while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Shift to R Reverse only after the vehicle is stopped To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging the transmission see f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 20 N Neutral In this position
65. display As each new track starts to play the track number displays 4 cp Eject Press and release to eject the CD that is currently playing in the bottom slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD can be removed If the CD is not removed after several seconds the CD automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject 4 DVD Eject Press and release to eject the CD that is currently playing in the top slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD can be removed If the CD is not removed after several seconds the CD automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject J Tune Turn to select tracks on the CD currently playing K SEEK D Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than five seconds have played If less than five seconds have played the previous track plays Press the right arrow to go to the next track If either arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through the tracks on the C
66. failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle warranty 6 2 Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance is important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from the vehicle To help protect the environment and to keep the vehicle in good condition be sure to maintain the vehicle properly Using the Maintenance Schedule We want to help keep this vehicle in good working condition But we do not know exactly how you will drive it You might drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you might drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You might use the vehicle in making deliveries Or you might drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You might need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the following and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition see your dealer retailer This schedule is for vehicles that e carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21
67. first STEP THREE U S Owners Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle However if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two you can file with the Better Business Bureau BBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days If you do not agree with the decision given in your case you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus Inc 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington VA 22203 1838 Telephone 1 800 955 5100 dr bbb org goauto This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia Eligibility is limited by vehicle age mileage and other factors General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and or discontinue its participation in t
68. folder for each album Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less Avoid subfolders The system can support up to 8 subfolders deep however keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback Make sure playlists have a m3u wpl or pls extension other file extensions might not work Minimize the length of the file folder or playlist names Long file folder or playlist names or a combination of a large number of files and folders or playlists can cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files folders playlists or sessions To play a larger number of files folders playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file folder or playlist name Long names also take up more space on the display Finalize the audio disc before burning it Trying to add music to an existing disc can cause the disc not to function in the player 3 91 Root Directory The root directory of the CD R or CD RW is treated as a folder If the root directory has compressed audio files the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders However playlists Px are always accessed before root folders or files Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains
69. get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately A CAUTION Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running 6 Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one 10 Do not connect positive to negative or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And do not connect the negative cable to the negative terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal of the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Do not let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive terminal of the good battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Now connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal of the good battery Use a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one Do not let the other end touch anythi
70. go to the next radio station stored as a favorite or the next track if a CD DVD is playing CR V Phone On Hook Previous Press to go to the previous radio station stored as a favorite the previous track if a CD DVD is playing to reject an incoming call or end a current call 3 117 amp ag Push to Talk Mute Press to silence the vehicle speakers only Press again to turn the sound on For vehicles with OnStar or Bluetooth systems press and hold for longer than two seconds to interact with those systems See OnStar System on page 2 39 and Bluetooth on page 3 97 in this manual for more information SRCE Source Press to switch between the radio AM FM XM CD and for vehicles with DVD front auxiliary and rear auxiliary lt 1 J Volume Press to increase or to decrease the radio volume Dbl Seek Press to go to the next radio station while in AM FM or XM Press PI to go to the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot Press the PI if multiple discs are loaded to go to the next disc while sourced to a CD player 3 118 Radio Reception Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as cell phone chargers vehicle convenience accessories and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet If there is interference or static unplug the item from the accessory power outlet AM The range for most AM
71. how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important It can depend on any special equipment on the vehicle and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section for more information Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight Ask your dealer retailer for our trailering information or advice or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7 6 for more information 4 35 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo carried in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle If there are a lot of options equipment passengers or cargo in the vehicle it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow If towing a trailer the tongue load must be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight too See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 for more information about the vehicle s maximum load capacity 4 36 If a weigh
72. in the Driver Information Center DIC Compass Zone The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory Your dealer retailer will set the correct zone for your location Under certain circumstances such as during a long distance cross country trip or moving to a new state or province it will be necessary to compensate for compass variance by resetting the zone through the DIC if the zone is not set correctly Compass variance is the difference between the earth s magnetic north and true geographic north If the compass is not set to the zone where you live the compass may give false readings The compass must be set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling To adjust for compass variance use the following procedure Compass Variance Zone Procedure 1 Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is moving Only set it when the vehicle is in P Park Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays Find the vehicle s current location and variance zone number on the map Zones 1 through 15 are available Press the set reset button to scroll through and select the appropriate variance zone Press the trip fuel button until the vehicle heading for example N for North is displayed in the DIC If calibration is necessary calibrate the compass See Compass Calibration Procedure following 3 47
73. inch cable to the radio s front auxiliary input jack When a device is connected press the radio CD AUX button to begin playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers D Power Volume Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player Additional volume adjustments might need to be made from the portable device if the volume does not go loud or soft enough BAND Press to listen to the radio when a portable audio device is playing The portable audio device continues playing until it is powered off CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press to play a CD when a portable audio device is playing Press again and the system begins playing audio from the connected portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Input Device Found or No Aux may display DVD CD AUX CD Auxiliary Radio with CD and DVD Press to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary while listening to the radio The DVD CD text tab and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and does not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX
74. lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 WMA file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays bb FWD Fast Forward Press and hold to advance playback quickly within an MP3 WMA file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays RDM Random With the random setting MP3 files on the CD R can be listened to in random rather than sequential order on one CD R CD RW or all discs in a six disc CD player To use random do one of the following 1 To play MP3 WMA files from the CD R or CD RW in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play 2 To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six disc CD player in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM tab until Randomize All Discs displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play 3 89 Music Navigator Use the music navigator feature to play MP3 files on the CD R or CD RW in order by artist or album Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator tab The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information It can take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3 WMA files recorded to the CD R or C
75. much flexing e Too much heat Tire overloading Premature or irregular wear Poor handling Reduced fuel economy 5 58 If your tires have too much air over inflation you can get the following Unusual wear Poor handling Rough ride e Needless damage from road hazards A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to your vehicle This label shows your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold The recommended cold tire inflation pressure shown on the label is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle s maximum load carrying capacity For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label see Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort Never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Do not forget to check the compact spare tire it should be at 60 psi 420 kPa For additional information regarding the compact spare tire see Compact Spare Tire on page 5 87 How to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflate
76. of the low oil pressure is corrected See Engine Oil on page 5 15 for more information This message displays when the vehicle s engine oil pressure is low The oil pressure light also appears on the instrument panel cluster See Oil Pressure Light US Canada on page 3 36 Stop the vehicle immediately as engine damage can result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer as soon as possible when this message is displayed PASSENGER DOOR FRONT REAR OPEN This message displays when one or more of the passenger doors are not closed properly Close the doors completely REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE This message displays while you are matching a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to your vehicle See LEARN REMOTE KEY under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 42 for more information SERVICE A C Air Conditioning SYSTEM This message displays when there is a problem detected in the air conditioning system Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer SERVICE AIR BAG This message displays when there is a problem with the airbag system Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer immediately See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 28 for more information SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE If your vehicle has the All Wheel Drive AWD system this message displays along with the service all wheel drive light if a problem occurs with this system See Servi
77. off the arrow symbol no longer displays i Information Base Radio with CD Press to switch the display between the track number elapsed time of the track and the time When the ignition is off press to display the time BAND Press to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The CD remains safely inside the radio for future listening CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press to play a CD when listening to the radio The CD icon and a message showing disc and or track number displays when a CD is in the player Press again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player Playing a CD In Either the DVD or CD Slot Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing loading a disc into the system depending on media type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source The CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate The DVD CD decks upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD deck of the radio are compatible with most audio CDs CD R CD RW and MP3s WMAs When a CD is inserted the text tab DVD or CD symbol appears on the left side of the radio
78. only folders subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files The empty folder does not display No Folder When the CD contains only compressed files the files are located under the root folder The next and previous folder functions are not displayed on a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists When displaying the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT When the CD contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files are located under the root folder The folder down and the folder up buttons search playlists Px first and then go to the root folder When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT 3 92 Order of Play Tracks recorded to the CD R or CD RW are played in the following order Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist When the last track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of the first playlist Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder When the last track of the last folder has played play continues from the first track of the first folder When play enters a new folder the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless the folder mode is c
79. or worn out the pads can be replaced separately from the headphone set It is not necessary to replace the complete headphone set The headphone replacement foam ear pads can be ordered in pairs See your dealer retailer for more information 3 109 Battery Replacement To change the batteries on the headphones do the following 1 Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located on the left side of the headphones Slide the battery door open 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place 3 110 Audio Video A V Jacks The A V jacks are located on the rear of the floor console The A V jacks allow audio or video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system Adapter connectors or cables might be required to connect the auxiliary device to the A V jacks Refer to the manufacturer s instructions for proper usage The A V jacks are color coded to match typical home entertainment system equipment The yellow jack A is for the video input The white jack B is for the left audio input The red jack is C for the right audio input Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied b
80. parts That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT We recommend against the use of such gasolines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system could be affected The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on If this occurs return to your dealer retailer for service Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel might be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by the vehicle warranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving Filling the Tank A CAUTION Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off the engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling the vehicle Do not use cellular phones Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Do not leave th
81. pre authorization original detailed receipts and a copy of the repair orders Once authorization has been received the Roadside Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements and explain how to receive payment Alternative Service If assistance cannot be provided right away the Roadside Assistance advisor may give you permission to get local emergency road service You will receive payment up to 100 after sending the original receipt to Roadside Assistance Mechanical failures may be covered however any cost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service contact your dealer retailer and request an appointment By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs your dealer retailer can help minimize your inconvenience If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service unless of course the problem is safety related If it is please call your dealership retailer let them know this and ask for instructions If the dealer retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for service you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair Courtesy Transportation Program To enhance your ownership experience we and our participating deale
82. purchased by the vehicle s owner are available in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint be sure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs 1 36 A CAUTION To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during a crash infants need complete support This is because an infant s neck is not fully developed and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant in a rear facing child restraint settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants should always be secured in rear facing child restraints Child Restraint Systems A CAUTION A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the
83. service more often when pulling a trailer See this manual s Maintenance Schedule or Index for more information Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid engine oil axle lubricant belts cooling system and brake system It is a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing The cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions See Engine Overheating on page 5 28 4 41 4 NOTES 4 42 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care SEVICE saani a reden Ea 5 3 Accessories and Modifications s ssssereeee 5 3 California Proposition 65 Warning 00 5 4 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 5 4 Doing Your Own Service Work 2e 5 4 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle eene iuen nt aea da Ea 5 5 UCU oe eases tenet cotati A A EAE E E AE 5 5 Gasoline Octane 22 ssj rr Eder rn ebbede isie 5 5 Gasoline Specifications sssseseeeeereeereernes 5 6 California Fuel 22 0 0 ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 5 6 fato lo INAS cenae E teneiewad eaten BUSSER 5 6 Fuels in Foreign Countries 0ceeeeeeeee es 5 7 Filling the Tank wins ars orkerne rdr cdetiee sess 5 8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 1 1 1 1 1 5 10 Checking Things Under the H
84. severely damaged A CAUTION An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan 5 26 A CAUTION Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pressure and if you turn the coolant surge tank pressure cap even a little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap If coolant is needed add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank 1 You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot A OPEW Roy 0 gt SURGE RESERVOIR TANK D EXPANSION 15 PSI 105 kPa 2 X m e KZ Al Q KS DEX coole _ S ouypie Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one quarter of a turn If you hear a hiss wait for that to stop This will allow any pressure still left to be vented out the discharge hose 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it 3 Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture to the COLD FILL line With the coo
85. shaped discolorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this we will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km of purchase whichever occurs first 5 95 Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number VIN st SAMPLE4UX1M072675 This is the legal identifier for the vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver side It can be seen through the windshield from outside the vehicle The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code This code helps identify the vehicle s engine specifications and replacement parts See Engine Specifications under Capacities and Specifications on page 5 103 for the vehicle s engine code 5 96 Service Parts Identification Label This label is on the inside of the glove box It is very helpful if parts need to be ordered The label has the following information Vehicle Identification Number VIN Model designation e Paint information Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment Notice Do not add anything electr
86. stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other For better radio reception most AM radio stations boost the power levels during the day and then reduce these levels during the night Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception When this happens try reducing the treble on the radio FM Stereo FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Although the radio has a built in electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce interference some static can occur especially around tall buildings or hills causing the sound to fade in and out XM Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast in the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada Just as with FM tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals causing the sound to fade in and out In addition traveling or standing under heavy foliage bridges garages or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time Cellular Phone Usage Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the vehicle s radio This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls charging the phone s battery or simply having the phone on This interference causes an increased level of static while listening to the radio If static is received while listenin
87. sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 40 1 Put the child restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 1 49 3 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of Position the release button on the buckle so that the retractor to set the lock the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 1 50 6 If the child restraint has a top tether follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions regarding the use of the top tether See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 42 for more information 7 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor disconnect it 5 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 1 51 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position This vehicle ha
88. system to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD If the forward arrow is showing on the display the system is in pause mode If the pause icon is showing on the display the system is in playback mode If the DVD screen is off press this button to turn the screen on Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have finished although there might be a delay of up to 30 seconds If the DVD does not begin playing the 3 82 movie automatically press the pushbutton located under the play pause symbol tag displayed on the radio If the DVD still does not play refer to the on screen instructions if available HE Stop Press to stop playing rewinding or fast forwarding a DVD Enter Press to select the choices that are highlighted in any menu Menu Press to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the pushbuttons located under the navigation arrows to navigate the cursor through the DVD menu After making a selection press the enter button This button only operates when using a DVD Nav Navigate Press to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus amp Return Press to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button operates only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active DVD A Audio Display Buttons Once a DVD A is inserted a radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing Press the pushbuttons located u
89. system is not operational Adjust your driving accordingly Traction Control System TCS The vehicle has a Traction Control System TCS that limits wheel spin This is especially useful in slippery road conditions The system operates only if it senses that one or more of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction When this happens the system works the brakes and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin A ee This light flashes while the traction control system is limiting wheel spin The system may be heard or felt while it is working but this is normal This light may also come on after extended heavy braking indicating the brakes have become too hot to limit wheel spin TCS automatically comes on whenever the vehicle is started To limit wheel spin especially in slippery road conditions the system should always be left on But TCS can be turned off if needed The system should be turned off if the vehicle ever gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow and rocking the vehicle is required See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4 21 TCS can be turned off by pressing the StabiliTrak TCS button located next to the gear shift lever ee When TCS is turned off the StabiliTrak TCS warning light comes on the instrument panel cluster and TRACTION CONTROL OFF briefly displays The traction control system can be activated again by pressing the traction control button While the traction contro
90. that purpose To reinstall fit together the tabs located on the front of the cover and push down on the cover until the tabs on the rear of the cover click into place 3 4L V6 Engine The remote positive terminal is located under the engine compartment fuse block cover and is marked with a plus symbol on the cover 5 37 3 6L V6 Engine The remote negative terminal is located in the front of the engine compartment near the engine oil dipstick See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on the location of the remote positive terminal and the engine oil dipstick 5 38 A CAUTION An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Z CAUTION Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery has enough water You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you do not explosive gas could be present CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Do not get it on you If you accidentally
91. the Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspect the air cleaner filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50 000 mile 80 000 km interval See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information If you are driving in dusty dirty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter To inspect the air cleaner filter remove the filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust and dirt If the filter remains caked with dirt a new filter is required To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter do the following 1 Turn off the engine 2 Disconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector 3 Loosen the screws on the clamps holding the air outlet duct in place Do not pry the clamps off 5 20 Remove the air outlet duct Undo the clamps on the filter cover To remove the cover pull up on the front and then pull the cover out Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter Wipe all dust from inside of the housing and inspect the air cleaner and air outlet duct for cracks cuts and deterioration The air outlet duct must be replaced if damaged Reinstall the filter cover and latch the clamps Reattach the air outlet duct and tighten the screws on the clamps that hold the duct in place Reconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector A CAUTION
92. the hood and unwrap the electrical cord The cord is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment near the radiator 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet A CAUTION Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts to prevent damage The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors Ask a dealer retailer in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice on this 2 23 Automatic Transmission Operation 3 4L V6 with 5 Speed A CAUTION The shift lever is located on the center console When you change gears the different shift positions will display It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift on the instrument panel cluster lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the pP R N I L engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure t
93. the radio s auxiliary input jack if the vehicle has this feature or A V jacks the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio from the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired headphones The front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this device through the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio 3 111 Video Screen The video screen is located in the overhead console To use the video screen do the following 1 Push the release button located on the overhead console 2 Move the screen to the desired position When the video screen is not in use push it up into its locked position If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked position the screen remains on this is normal and the DVD continues to play through the previous audio source Use the remote control b button or ZA the disc to turn off the screen The overhead console contains the IR transmitters for the wireless headphones and the IR receivers for the remote control They are located at the rear of the console Notice Avoid directly touching the video screen as damage may occur See Cleaning the Video Screen later in this section for more information 3 112 Remote Control To use the remote control aim it at the transmitter window at the rear of the RSE overhead console and press the desired button Direct sunlight or very bright light can affect the ability of the RSE transmitter t
94. the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash Q What is wrong with this on A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body A The shoulder belt is too loose It will not give as much protection this way Q What is wrong with this A The lap belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way A CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose In a crash you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs Q What is wrong with this A The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle 1 20 A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces wou
95. them carefully Store CD s in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust The CD and DVD player scans the bottom surface of the disc If the surface of a CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD does not play properly or not at all Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it this could damage the surface Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge If the surface of a CD is soiled take a soft lint free cloth or dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution mixed with water and clean it Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge Care of the CD and DVD Player Do not add any label to a CD it could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism Notice If a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials li
96. way and start again 3 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt is not long enough see Safety Belt Extender on page 1 30 Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster move it to the height that is right for you See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment later in this section for instructions on use and important safety information 1 25 5 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants To unlatch the belt just push the button on the buckle For outboard seating positions slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing when the safety belt is not in use The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt near the guide loop Before a door is closed be sure the safety belt is out of the way If a door is slammed against a safety belt damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger seating positions Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on the shoulder The belt should be away from the face and neck but
97. where the child restraint will be placed Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 40 for additional information 1 45 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System A CAUTION If a LATCH type child restraint is not attached to anchors the child restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly In a crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Install a LATCH type child restraint properly using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual A CAUTION Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash A child or others could be injured To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash attach only one child restraint per anchor 1 46 A CAUTION Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety
98. with no action Press D V to disconnect the current call and switch to the call on hold Three Way Calling Three Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work 1 While on a call press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Three way call The system responds with Three way call please say dial or call Use the dial or call command to dial the number of the third party to be called Once the call is connected press amp to link all the callers together Ending a Call Press CD V to end a call Muting a Call During a call all sounds from inside the vehicle can be muted so that the person on the other end of the call cannot hear them To Mute a call 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Mute Call The system responds with Call muted To Cancel Mute 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 After the tone say Mute Call The system responds with Resuming call 3 105 Transferring a Call Audio can be transferred between the in vehicle Bluetooth system and the cell phone To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone During a call with the audio in the vehicle 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Transfer Call The system responds with Tr
99. you know the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator it means that the right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag If after several seconds both status indicator lights remain on or if there are no lights at all there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system See your dealer retailer for service A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 28 for more information including important safety information 3 29 Charging System Light If this light comes on while you are driving you may have a problem with the charging system A charging system Driver Information Center DIC message may also appear See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 for more information This light could indicate that you have problems with a generator drive belt or another electrical problem Have it checked right away If you must drive a short distance with the light on be certain to turn off all your accessories
100. your driving accordingly See StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 This message displays only while the ignition is in ON RUN Any of the following conditions may cause the StabiliTrak System to turn off The StabiliTrak System is turned off by pressing and holding the traction control button See StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 for more information The battery is low There is a StabiliTrak System failure See your dealer retailer for service 3 55 STARTING DISABLD Disabled SERVICE THRTTLE Throttle This message displays if the starting of the engine is disabled due to the electronic throttle control system Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer immediately This message only appears while the ignition is in ON RUN and will not disappear until the problem is resolved This message cannot be acknowledged THEFT ATTEMPTED This message displays if the content theft deterrent system has detected a break in attempt while you were away from your vehicle See Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 17 for more information TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS is re learning the tire positions on your vehicle The tire positions must be re learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 66 Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 61 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 58 for more
101. 0 N Neutral In this position the engine does not connect with the wheels To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving use N Neutral only A CAUTION Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed Notice Shifting out of P Park or N Neutral with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle Notice Shifting to a drive gear from NEUTRAL N while the vehicle is moving could damage the transmission Make sure the vehicle is stopped before shifting from NEUTRAL N into a drive gear 2 25 D Drive This position is for normal driving with the automatic transmission It provides the best fuel economy If you need more power for passing and you are Going less than about 35 mph 55 km h push the accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h push the accelerator all the way down Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding see Skidding under Loss of Control on page 4 12 I Intermediate This position is also used for normal driving How
102. 1 63 The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger seat The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the right front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or not According to accident statistics children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding in a booster seat and children who are large enough using safety belts A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys 1 64 A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not
103. 2009 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual Li Seats and Restraint System 00 1 1 Front Sats essen niaan ena oE E a 1 2 Rear Seats oo ccc ec ccc ccc eeneceeneceeeneenenes 1 10 Safety Bells cc cceisdersondiawteondageatencaedaccwizaancad 1 12 Child Restraints oo ccccecceecceeceee eee eee eens 1 31 Airbag System oo ccccc cece eee eec eee eeeeeeenees 1 55 Restraint System Check ou 0 ec ceeee eee eee ee 1 70 Features and Controls 2 cecceceeeeeeeeeeeees 2 1 SV RE EEN ua ce encase E es 2 3 Doors and LOCKS oo cece cece cece ec eceeeeeeeeeeeenes 2 10 WINGOWS sisenes c cece cece cee ec ec ee cece essen enenenenenes 2 14 Theft Deterrent Systems 2 2 16 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle _ 2 19 Minors sordet e a aat 2 37 OnStar System ennui aein aiai 2 39 Storage Areas oo eee e cece eee ce ee eeneceeeeneeeens 2 42 SSUMMOOL aiea aE e ohebbeniense 2 49 Instrument Panel ccccccee sees cess sees eens ene es 3 1 Instrument Panel Overview _ c0cceeeee 3 4 Climate Controls oo sul une ec ccc eee ee ss ks 3 1 Warning Lights Gages and Indicators _ 3 24 Driver Information Center DIC ow eee 3 42 Audio System S ccceceeceeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeees 3 64 Driving Your Vehicle eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 1 Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle __ 4 2 TOWING secsi e Ea ei aS aE chess 4 27 Service and Appearance Care 2
104. 21 Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts Even though today s airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job 1 56 Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system A CAUTION You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt even if you have airbags Airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them Also airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash In some crashes safety belts are your only restraint See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 1 60 Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Airbags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person A CAUTION Airbags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye Anyone who is up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Do not sit unnecessarily close to the airbag as you would be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with airbags The driver should
105. 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French or write General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines transmission axle suspension brakes electrical steering body etc Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give additional technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle Owner Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle The owner manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models In Portfolio Includes a Portfolio Owner Manual and Warranty Booklet RETAIL SELL PRICE 35 00 U S plus processing fee Without Portfolio Owner Manual only RETAIL SELL PRICE 25 00 U S plus processing fee Current and Past Model Order Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles To request an order form specify year and model name of the vehicle ORDER TOLL FREE 1 800 551 4123 Monday Friday 8 00 AM 6 00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only VISA MasterCard Discover visit Helm Inc on the World Wide Web at helm
106. CD or DVD five times the normal speed The radio displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse To stop fast reversing press again This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews gt gt FWD Fast Forward Press to fast forward the CD or DVD The radio displays the elapsed time and fast forwards five times the normal speed To stop fast forwarding press again This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews A Eject Press to eject a CD or DVD If a CD or DVD is ejected but not removed the player automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject 3 81 DVD V Video Display Buttons Once a DVD V is inserted the radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing Press the pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during DVD playback See the tag options listed below for more information The rear seat passenger navigates the DVD V menus and controls through the remote control See Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 108 for more information The Video Screen automatically turns on when the DVD V is inserted into the DVD slot gt il Play Pause Press either play or pause displayed on the radio
107. CK This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn off the automatic door unlocking feature It also allows you to select which doors and when the doors will automatically unlock See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 11 for more information Press the vehicle information button until AUTO UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings OFF None of the doors will automatically unlock DRIVER KEY OUT Only the driver s door will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition DRIVER IN PARK Only the driver s door will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P Park ALL AT KEY OUT All of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition ALL IN PARK default All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P Park NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC REMOTE LOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if any of the doors are open See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 for more infor
108. Compass Calibration The compass can be manually calibrated Only calibrate the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location such as an open parking lot where driving the vehicle in circles is not a danger It is suggested to calibrate away from tall buildings utility wires manhole covers or other industrial structures if possible If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display the compass should be calibrated If the DIC display does not show a heading for example N for North or the heading does not change after making turns there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass Such interference may be caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount a magnetic emergency light magnetic note pad holder or any other magnetic item Turn off the vehicle move the magnetic item then turn on the vehicle and calibrate the compass 3 48 To calibrate the compass use the following procedure Compass Calibration Procedure 1 Before calibrating the compass make sure the compass zone is set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is located See Compass Variance Zone Procedure earlier in this section Do not operate any switches such as window sunroof climate controls seats etc during the calibration procedure 2 Press the vehicle information button until PRESS TO CALIBRATE COMPAS Compass displays 3 Press the set reset button to start the compass calibration 4 The DIC will displa
109. D 3 77 lt lt REV Fast Reverse Press and hold to reverse playback quickly within a track Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track displays gt gt FwD Fast Forward Press and hold to advance playback quickly within a track Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track displays RDM Random With the random setting tracks can be listened to in random rather than sequential order To play the tracks from the CD press the DVD CD AUX button when not sourced to the CD or insert a disc partway into the slot A RDM tab displays Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play BAND Press to listen to the radio when a CD or DVD is playing The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment 3 78 DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text tab and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sour
110. D RW The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the background When the scan is finished the CD R or CD RW begins playing again Once the disc has been scanned the player defaults to playing MP3 WMA files in order by artist The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display between the arrows Once all songs by that artist are played the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order on the CD R or CD RW and begins playing MP3 files by that artist To listen to MP3 WMA files by another artist press the pushbutton located below either arrow button The CD goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order Continue pressing either button until the desired artist displays 3 90 To change from playback by artist to playback by album press the pushbutton located below the Sort By tab From the sort screen push one of the buttons below the album button Press the pushbutton below the back tab to return to the main music navigator screen Now the aloum name is displayed on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begins to play Once all songs from that album are played the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD R CD RW and begin playing MP3 WMA files from that album To exit music navigator mode press the pushbutton below the Back tab to return to normal MP3 WMA playback BAND Press to listen to the radio when a CD is playing T
111. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle To be even more certain the vehicle will not move you should put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed That would be the tire on the other side at the opposite end of the vehicle or even killed Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving When the vehicle has a flat tire B use the following 1 Set the parking brake firmly example as a guide to assist you in the placement 2 Put the shift lever in P Park of wheel blocks A CAUTION Continued 5 76 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools If your vehicle has the rear compartment storage panel cover you will have to remove it to access the load floor See Rear Compartment Storage Panel Cover on page 2 45 for more information To access the spare tire and tools A Wheel Block B Flat Tire The following information explains how to use the jack and change a tire 1 Lift the load floor up and pull it out of the vehicle and set it aside 5 Remove the wing bolt holding the jack and then remove it 6 Remove the hook and loop fastener straps holding the bag containing the wheel wrench Remove the wheel wrench from the bag 2 Remove the nut retaining the spare tire 7 Extend the socket portion of the wrench from the 3 Remove the compact spare tire See Compact handle Spare Tire on page 5 87 for more information
112. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 American Petroleum Institute API starburst symbol Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API Notice Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Cold Temperature Operation If in an area of extreme cold where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C use either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 engine oil Both provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures Always use an oil that meets the required specification GM6094M See What Kind of Engine Oil to Use for more information Engine Oil Additives Engine Oil Flushes Do not add anything to the oil The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revoluti
113. ELAY ON default The doors will not lock until five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is closed NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC EXIT LIGHTNG Lighting This feature allows you to select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark enough outside This happens after the key is turned from ON RUN to LOCK OFF Press the vehicle information button until EXIT LIGHTNG Lighting appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lamps will not turn on 30 SECONDS default The exterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds 1 MINUTE The exterior lamps will stay on for one minute 2 MINUTES The exterior lamps will stay on for two minutes NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC APPRCH Approach LIGHTNG Lighting This feature allows you to select whether or not to have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods after unlocking the vehicle using the RKE transmitter Press the vehicle information button until APPRCH Approach LIG
114. HTNG Lighting appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lights will not turn on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter ON default If it is dark enough outside the exterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed or the vehicle is no longer off See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 for more information NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 61 CHIME VOLUME This feature allows you to select the volume level of the chime Press the vehicle information button until CHIME VOLUME appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings NORMAL The chime volume will be set to a normal level LOUD The chime volume will be set to a loud level NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain There is no default for chime volume The volume will stay at the last known setting To select a s
115. ION Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows The window switches for all doors are located on the center console A window switch for each rear window is located on each rear door To open or close a window press or pull the switch The power windows operate when the ignition is in ON RUN ACC ACCESSORY or while in Retained Accessory Power RAP See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 21 Express Down Window The driver s window switch has an express down feature that allows the window to be lowered without holding the switch Press the switch part way and the driver s window opens a small amount Press the switch down all the way release it and the window goes down automatically To stop the window while it is lowering press and release the switch Window Lockout fas Window Lockout Your vehicle has a lockout feature to prevent rear seat passengers from operating the windows Press the lockout button located with the power window s
116. If there is a problem with the system that controls the temperature display the numbers will be replaced with dashes If this occurs have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an extended period of time consult your dealer retailer Under certain circumstances especially when the engine is idling a delay updating the temperature display is normal The DIC also allows some features to be personalized See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 57 for more information 3 42 DIC Operation and Displays The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on the center of the instrument panel DIC Buttons The buttons are the trip fuel vehicle information and set reset buttons The button functions are detailed in the following pages ZX Trip Fuel Press this button to scroll through the trip and fuel displays See Trip Fuel Menu Items following for more information on these displays Ti Vehicle Information Press this button to scroll through the vehicle information displays and to personalize the feature settings on your vehicle See Vehicle Information Menu Items following and DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 57 for more information on these displays V Set Reset Press this button to set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC Trip Fuel Menu Items ZX Tri
117. M DD YYYY displays 4 Press the pushbutton below any one of the tabs you want to change 3 66 5 To increase the time or date do one of the following e Press the pushbutton located below the selected tab Press D1 SEEK or DD FWD e Turn J clockwise 6 To decrease the time or date do one of the following Press KI SEEK or JT REV Turn dd counterclockwise The date does not automatically display To see the date press MENU and then softkey below the tab while the radio is on The date with display times out after a few seconds and goes back to the normal radio and time display To change the time default setting from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change the date default setting from month day year to day month year 1 Press MENU and then the pushbutton below the tab The HR MIN MM DD YYYY displays 2 Press the pushbutton below the forward arrow tab The time 12H and 24H and the date MM DD YYYY month day and year and DD MM YYYY day month and year displays 3 Press the pushbutton located below the desired option 4 Press MENU again to apply the selected default or let the screen time out Radio s OAM 640 9 389 mM 680 Y 730 Y 96 1Y985 X41 pr ELECT Bl a lt a gt gt BAND SEEK SEEK REV Fwo ff CD AUX Radio with CD MP3 shown Base Radio with CD and Radio with Six Disc CD MP3 similar MM HHHH B m 20 I DVD CD Radio with CD and DVD MP3 The vehicle has
118. ON Never do this Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle Due to crash forces an infant or a child Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash For example in a crash at only 40 km h 25 mph a 5 5 kg 12 Ib infant will suddenly become a 110 kg 240 Ib force ona person s arms An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag 1 34 CAUTION Continued in a rear seat It is also better to secure a forward facing child restraint in a rear seat If you must secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go A CAUTION Never do this Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Never put a rear facing child restraint in the right front seat Secure a rear facing child restraint CAUTION Continued 1 35 Q What are the different types of add on child A restraints Add on child restraints which are
119. The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa Press the vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT TIRES PSI kPa LF RF Press the vehicle information button again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI kPa LR RR If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving a message advising you to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 58 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 for more information If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a value there may be a problem with your vehicle If this consistently occurs see your dealer retailer for service BATTERY Press the vehicle information button until BATTERY displays This display shows the current battery voltage If the voltage is normal the display will show NORMAL If the voltage is low or high the display will show LOW or HIGH Your vehicle s charging system regulates voltage based on the state of the battery The battery voltage may fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC This is normal See Charging System Light on page 3 30 for more information If there is a problem with the battery charging system the DIC will display SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM See SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM under DIC Warnings and Messages o
120. accommodate a rear facing child restraint we recommend that rear facing child restraints not be transported in your vehicle even if the airbag is off Wherever you install a child restraint be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it If you need to secure more than one child restraint in the rear seat review the following illustrations Depending on where you place the child restraint or the size of the child restraint you may not be able to access certain safety belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or child restraints Configurations for Use of Child Restraints gt Child restraint using LATCH Occupant prohibited Occupant prohibited Child restraint using LATCH 1 41 1 42 Child restraint using LATCH Occupant prohibited Child restraint or occupant using safety belt Child restraint or occupant using safety belt Child restraint or occupant using safety belt Child restraint using LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in a crash This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier The LATCH system uses
121. age try charging or jump starting the battery See Jump Starting on page 5 36 for more information To shift out of P Park 1 Apply the brake pedal 2 Press the shift lever button 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you still are unable to shift out of P Park 1 Fully release the shift lever button 2 While holding down the brake pedal press the shift lever button again 3 Move the shift lever to the desired position If you still cannot move the shift lever from P Park see your dealer retailer 2 34 Parking Over Things That Burn A CAUTION Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite Do not park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn Engine Exhaust A CAUTION Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death Exhaust may enter the vehicle if The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation parking garages tunnels deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued The vehicle s exhaust system has been modified damaged or improperly repaired There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or after market modifications that are not completel
122. aijnt aeae aani erne acetates 3 47 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements 5 4 California Fuel arcsin astenia 5 6 California Proposition 65 Warning 5 4 Canadian OWNne S ccceeeeeeeee eee eeee kirio aiaia ii Capacities and Specifications 00 5 103 Carbon Monoxide Engine Exhaust 32k hole else 2 35 Liftgate ecoa e A E eder 2 12 Winter Driving cies bosrierisoniiionanieunann nuan 4 17 Care of Safety Belts 22 0 0 ccceec cee eeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeeee 5 91 Cargo Lamp sorire ieee et deehe E ener 3 16 Me DOWNS srecno teni a a aE 2 48 GD IMPS ESEE EE ES naedder 3 86 3 91 Center Console Storage ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 42 Chains Tre samine aE r A A EN 5 74 Charging System Light ceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 3 30 Check Engine Lamp 222 si dcvdsoreacesadapiasecceneasaseatiecepes 3 34 Checking Things Under the Hood 00 5 10 Chemical Paint Spotting ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 95 Child Restraints Infants and Young Children ceeeeeeeeee 1 34 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children 1 42 Older Children siise a esenea 1 31 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position sc gier isse een 1 49 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position 1 52 SYSTEMS airaines es a Mate aS eiiiai 1 37 Where to Put the Restraint cee 1 40 Cigarette Lighter cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
123. aint finish Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer retailer If the vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish Notice Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage it Use only non abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bird droppings chemicals from industrial chimneys etc can damage the vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years To help keep the paint finish looking new keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster Washing with water is all that is usually needed However chrome polish may be used on chrome or stainless steel trim if necessary Use special care with aluminum trim To avoid damaging protective trim never use auto or
124. and safety including such things as airbags braking stability ride and handling emissions systems aerodynamics durability and electronic systems like antilock brakes traction control and stability control Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty Damage to vehicle components resulting from the installation or use of non GM certified parts including control module modifications are not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle Your GM dealer retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories When you go to your GM dealer retailer and ask for GM Accessories you will know that GM trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories Also see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 68 California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles including this one contain and or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Engine exhaust many parts and systems including some inside the vehicle many fluids and some component wear by products contain and or emit these chemicals California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Certain types of automotive applications such
125. and Modifications on page 5 3 Antilock Brake System ABS This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System ABS an advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to drive away ABS checks itself A momentary motor or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal moves a little This is normal If there is a problem with ABS this warning light stays on See Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light on page 3 31 Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here is what happens with ABS A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel as required faster than any driver could This can help the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard As the brakes are applied the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always l
126. and will go back to empty when you turn the ignition off For your fuel tank capacity see Capacities and Specifications on page 5 103 Low Fuel Warning Light This light is located in the fuel gage For more information see Fuel Gage on page 3 40 This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel When you add fuel the light should go off If it does not have your vehicle serviced A Fuel Level LOW message also appears in the Driver Information Center DIC See Fuel Gage on page 3 40 for more information 3 41 Driver Information Center DIC Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center DIC All messages will appear in the DIC display located in the center of the instrument panel cluster The DIC buttons are located on the center of the instrument panel The DIC comes on when the ignition is on After a short delay the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off The DIC displays trip fuel and vehicle system information and warning messages if a system problem is detected The top of the DIC display shows the shift lever position indicator See Automatic Transmission Operation 3 4L V6 with 5 Speed on page 2 24 or Automatic Transmission Operation 3 6L V6 with 6 Speed on page 2 27 for more information If your vehicle has these feature the DIC also displays the compass direction and the outside air temperature when viewing the trip and fuel information
127. anel 8 Put the compact spare tire near you A CAUTION Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack 5 80 A CAUTION Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle A CAUTION Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training If a jack is provided with the vehicle it is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack If a jack is provided with the vehicle only use it for changing a flat tire Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the road tire to clear the ground 5 81 10 Remove all of the wheel nuts A CAUTION Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When changing a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an em
128. ange the setting O Off Turns the lamp off even when a door is open Door The lamp comes on automatically when a door is opened gt On Turns the dome lamp on Entry Lighting The dome lamp and the cargo lamp inside the vehicle comes on when any door is opened if the dome lamp is in the door position In addition these lamps come on when the Remote Keyless Entry RKE unlock button is pressed It stays on for 20 seconds or until a door is opened After the door is opened and then closed the light remains on for 20 seconds or until the key is put in the ignition and turned to the ON RUN position Map Lamps The vehicle may have lamps located on the headliner above the rearview mirror Push on the lens in the lamp to turn them on and off Cargo Lamp The cargo lamp is located over the rear compartment and is controlled by the dome lamp See Dome Lamp on page 3 16 Electric Power Management The vehicle has Electric Power Management EPM that estimates the battery s temperature and state of charge It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery When the battery s state of charge is low the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up When the state of charge is high the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information Center DIC you may see the voltage m
129. ansferring call and the audio will switch from the vehicle to the cell phone To Transfer Audio to the In Vehicle Bluetooth System The cellular phone must be paired and connected with the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred The connection process can take up to two minutes after the key is turned to the ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY position During a call with the audio on the cell phone press for more than two seconds The audio switches from the cell phone to the vehicle 3 106 Voice Pass Thru Voice Pass Thru allows access to the voice recognition commands on the cell phone See the cell phone manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone supports this feature This feature can be used to verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with Bluetooth ready followed by a tone 3 Say Voice The system responds with OK accessing lt phone name gt The cell phone s normal prompt messages will go through its cycle according to the phone s operating instructions Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Tones The in vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and numbers stored as name tags during a call This is used when calling a menu driven phone system Account numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for retrieval during menu dri
130. ant points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure the rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you will be driving A good source for this information can be state or provincial police Consider using a sway control See Hitches later in this section Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 800 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Vehicles can tow in D Drive Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and or hilly conditions e Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers or no more than 55 mph 90 km h to save wear on the vehicle s parts Three important considerations have to do with weight e Weight of the trailer e Weight of the trailer tongue e Weight on your vehicle s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be The vehicle can tow up to 3 500 Ibs 1 575 kg But even that can be too heavy It depends on how the rig is used For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and
131. ar systems correct say No The system will ask for the The system uses the following commands to store and number tobere entered retrieve phone numbers e Store Digit Store Directory 3 100 4 After the system stores the phone number it responds with Please say the name tag followed by a tone 5 Say a name tag for the phone number The name tag is recorded and the system responds with About to store lt name tag gt Does that sound OK e If the name tag does not sound correct say No and repeat Step 5 If the name tag sounds correct say Yes and the name tag is stored After the number is stored the system returns to the main menu Using the Digit Store Command The digit store command allows a phone number to be stored by entering the digits individually 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Digit Store The system responds with Please say the first digit to store followed by a tone Say the first digit to be stored The system will repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone Continue entering digits until the number to be stored is complete e If an unwanted number is recognized by the system say Clear at any time to clear the last number To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system say Verify at any time and the system will repeat them After the
132. arly recognizes the name tag it responds with OK calling lt name tag gt and dials the number If the system is unsure it recognizes the right name tag it confirms the name tag followed by a tone If the name tag is correct say Yes The system responds with OK calling lt name tag gt and dials the number If the name tag is not correct say No The system will ask for the name tag to be re entered Once connected the person called will be heard through the audio speakers 3 104 Using the Re dial Command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 After the tone say Re dial The system responds with Re dial using lt phone name gt and dials the last number called from the connected Bluetooth phone Once connected the person called will be heard through the audio speakers Receiving a Call When an incoming call is received the audio system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle Press and begin speaking to answer the call e Press CD V to ignore a call Call Waiting Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work Press amp to answer an incoming call when another call is active The original call is placed on hold Press amp again to return to the original call To ignore the incoming call continue with the original call
133. ault settings To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC FEATURE SETTNGS Settings PRESS V TO EXIT This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu Press the vehicle information button until FEATURE SETTNGS Settings PRESS TO EXIT appears in the DIC display Press the set reset button to exit the menu If you do not exit pressing the vehicle information button again will return you to the beginning of the vehicle information menu Exiting the Feature Settings Menu The feature settings menu will be exited when any of the following occurs The vehicle is shifted out of P Park The vehicle is no longer in ON RUN The trip fuel DIC button is pressed The end of the feature settings menu is reached and exited A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made 3 63 Audio System s For more information see Defensive Driving on page 4 2 Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the following pages to become familiar with its features Notice Contact your dealer retaller before adding any equipment Adding audio or communication equipment could 5 interfere with the operation of the vehicle s engine A CAUTION radio or other systems and could damage them Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods telephone equipment could cause a crash resulting in injury
134. button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front AUX and Rear AUX if available See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 108 Audio Video A V Jacks for more information 3 85 Using an MP3 Radio with CD or Six Disc CD Player MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW Disc The radio plays MP3 and WMA files that were recorded ona CD R or CD RW disc The files can be recorded with the following fixed bit rates 32 kbps 40 kbps 56 kbps 64 kbps 80 kbps 96 kbps 112 kbps 128 kbps 160 kbps 192 kbps 224 kbps 256 kbps and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate Song title artist name and album are displayed by the radio when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2 Compressed Audio The radio also plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio CDA files and MP3 WMA files By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio and ignores the MP3 WMA files Pressing the CAT category button toggles between compressed and uncompressed audio format 3 86 MP3 WMA Format If you burn an MP3 WMA disc on a personal computer Make sure the MP3 WMA files are recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc Do not mix standard audio and MP3 WMA files on one disc The CD player is able to read and play a maximum of 50 folders 50 playlists and 255 files Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Organ
135. cargo being loaded on the vehicle That 1 Locate the statement The combined weight weight may not safely exceed the available of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard hoe wggaga load eapaciy calculated 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load and passengers that will be riding in your from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle vehicle Consult this manual to determine how 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver this reduces the available cargo and luggage and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs load capacity for your vehicle 4 The resulting figure equals the available If your vehicle can tow a trailer see Towing a amount of cargo and luggage load capacity Trailer on page 4 34 for important information For example if the XXX amount equals on towing a trailer towing safety rules and 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib trailering tips passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs 4 23 A 4 24 Example 1 Description Maximum Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 68 kg x 2 Available Occupant and Cargo Weight 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 300 Ibs 136 kg 700 Ibs 317 kg Example 2 Item Description Total A Maximum Vehicle Capacity Weight for E
136. carrier is not in use lock one crossrail at the rear most position on the siderails and lock the other crossrail above the opening of the rear door to reduce wind noise Rear Compartment Storage Panel Cover For vehicles with an adjustable panel cargo cover feature the cover can be adjusted into three positions There may also be a flip panel towards the front of the cargo cover The panel may have to be moved upward in order to gain access to the cargo cover 2 45 The panel can be used in this position if additional space is needed above the panel Place the cargo on top of the panel in this position A CAUTION If you were to carry things on the adjustable panel when it is in the upper cargo cover or center positions during a sudden vehicle movement or a crash those things could be thrown around in the vehicle You or others could be injured When it is in the upper or center position always secure any cargo on the floor beneath the panel cover To use the panel in the lower position do the following 1 Insert the front corners of the panel into the To use the panel in the center position do the following lower guides 1 Insert the front corners of the panel into the 2 Slide the panel forward middle guides 3 Press down on the back of the panel to lock 2 Slide the panel forward it in place 3 Press down and pull rearward on the back of the panel to lock it in place 2 46 The panel can be
137. ce After an airbag inflates you will need some new parts for the airbag system If you do not get them the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 7 18 and Event Data Recorders on page 7 18 Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly See your dealer retailer for service Passenger Sensing System The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel when the vehicle is started PASSENGER AIRBAG A ON OFF 2 LAES oe 2 United States Canada The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off will be visible during the system check When the system check is complete either the word ON or the word OFF or the symbol for on or off will be visible See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 29 The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions The driver airbags are not affected by the passenger sensing system
138. ce All Wheel Drive Light on page 3 39 If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the AWD system needs service See your dealer retailer SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM This message displays when there is a problem with the generator and battery charging systems Driving with this problem could drain the vehicle s battery Turn off all unnecessary accessories Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so Have the electrical system checked by your dealer retailer immediately Connecting a battery charger to your vehicle while the ignition is in any position other than LOCK OFF may cause this message to appear If you need to charge your vehicle make sure that the key is in LOCK OFF or out of the ignition during charging SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message displays and a chime sounds when the brake fluid level is low The brake system warning light also appears on the instrument panel cluster when this message appears on the DIC See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 30 Have the brake system serviced by your dealer retailer as soon as possible 3 53 SERVICE POWER STEERING On some vehicles this message displays when a problem is detected with the power steering system When this message is displayed you may notice that the effort req
139. ce parts as needed Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear k A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired and the fluid level checked Add fluid if needed I f driving regularly under dusty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change m Visually inspect belt for fraying excessive cracks or obvious damage Replace belt if necessary n Severe service is when the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service 0 Change the fluid the first time the vehicle is serviced after 100 000 miles 166 000 km and when the vehicle is serviced after each subsequent 50 000 miles 83 000 km Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety dependability and emission control performance Your dealer retailer can assist with these checks and services Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 At Each Fuel Fill It is important to perform these und
140. ces and does not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front AUX and Rear AUX if available See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 108 Audio Video A V Jacks for more information If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD tracks only through the remote control Audio Output Only one audio source can be heard through the speakers at one time An audio source is defined as DVD slot CD slot XM FM AM Front Aux Jack or Rear Aux Jack Press the b button to turn the radio on The radio can be heard through all of the vehicle speakers Front seat passengers can listen to the radio AM FM or XM by pressing the BAND button or the DVD CD AUX button to select CD slot DVD slot front or rear auxiliary input if available If a playback device is plugged into the radio s front auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack the front seat passengers is able to listen to playback from this source through the vehicle speakers See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 108 Audio Video A V Jacks for more information Playing an MP3 WMA CD R o
141. chedule Maintenance Schedule 0 0eeeeeeee 6 2 Owner Checks and Services 0 0 0e0eee es 6 10 MtHOGUCTION eee seere E A E SES REDER De Fre 6 2 At Each Fuel Ril seserian 6 10 Maintenance Requirements ssseeeerererrere 6 2 At Least Once a Month sssssseeerererreree 6 11 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 At Least Once a Year ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 11 Using the Maintenance Schedule 55 6 2 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 13 Scheduled Maintenance eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 6 4 Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 15 Additional Required Services ceeeeeeee ee 6 7 Engine Drive Belt Routing c eee 6 16 Maintenance Footnotes 0ececeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 8 Maintenance Record ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 17 6 1 Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended Protection Plan Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan The Plan supplements the vehicle warranties See the Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer retailer for details Maintenance Requirements Notice Maintenance intervals checks inspections replacement parts and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep this vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by
142. chrome polish steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum A coating of wax rubbed to high polish is recommended for all bright metal parts Windshield and Wiper Blades Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent Wash the windshield thoroughly when cleaning the blades Bugs road grime sap anda buildup of vehicle wash wax treatments may cause wiper streaking Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged Wipers can be damaged by Extreme dusty conditions Sand and salt Heat and sun Snow and ice without proper removal 5 93 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels and Trim The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome plated wheels Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied Notice Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium calcium or sodium chloride These chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust Always wash the vehicle s chrome with soap and water after exposure Notice Using strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes cleaners brushes or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome plated wheels could damage the sur
143. complete number has been entered say Store The system responds with Please say the name tag followed by a tone Say a name tag for the phone number The name tag is recorded and the system responds with About to store lt name tag gt Does that sound OK If the name tag does not sound correct say No and repeat Step 5 If the name tag sounds correct say Yes and the name tag is stored After the number is stored the system returns to the main menu 3 101 Using the Directory Command The directory command lists all of the name tags stored by the system To use the directory command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Directory The system responds with Directory and then plays back all of the stored name tags When the list is complete the system returns to the main menu Deleting Name Tags The system uses the following commands to delete name tags Delete Delete all name tags Using the Delete Command The delete command allows specific name tags to be deleted To use the delete command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Delete The system responds with Delete please say the name tag followed by a tone 3 102 3 Say the name tag to be deleted The system responds with Would you like to delete
144. csinaatiecceds 2 10 Dor LOCKS sack AN aaee ASEAS AENA 2 10 Power Door LOCKS eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 10 Delayed LOCKING i s seccieeetieteadenede ent Hr sanne 2 10 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 11 Rear Door Security LOCKS 0cceeeeeeeeees 2 11 Lockout Protection saa ese ASi 2 12 LMG E E E EE EEN SL ES FRE LER 2 12 WINKOWS EN NE ET LEN 2 14 Power Windows 20 ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 15 Sun VISORS aberne hr aa n Eae 2 16 Theft Deterrent Systems ssssseeeeeeee 2 16 Content Theft Deterrent sssseeeeeeree 2 17 PASS Key IIl Electronic Immobilizer 2 17 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation 53253 arb nedevneadiasctacyiedeuieaendieas 2 18 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 19 New Vehicle Break In eeseeeeeeeeeee renee 2 19 IGNITION POSITIONS sss uhh SEK Haun ates 2 20 Retained Accessory Power RAP dcdce 2 21 Starting the Engine cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 21 Engine Coolant Heater seeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 2 23 Automatic Transmission Operation 3 4L V6 with 5 Speed 2 0 0 eeeeeeeeeee eens 2 24 Automatic Transmission Operation 3 6L V6 with 6 Speed 2 00 00 eeeeeeeeeee eee 2 27 Parking Brake s2ccccpectarscacntecetossauaieanesueabaceactes 2 31 Shifting Into Park sopranen saks rer otai 2 32 Shifting Out of Park 55808 rer orkan bleve se her 2 33 Parki
145. ct the vehicle s battery When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is turned off the battery rundown protection system will automatically turn the lamp off after 20 minutes This will avoid draining the battery This vehicle also has a retained accessory power feature If the radio is on it will turn off after 10 minutes or if any door on the vehicle is opened See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 21 3 17 Accessory Power Outlet s The accessory power outlets can be used to connect electrical equipment such as a cellular phone The two accessory power outlets are located in the front and at the rear of the center console storage area To use the outlets remove the cover When not in use always cover the outlet with the protective cap Notice If electrical devices are left plugged into a power outlet the battery may drain causing the vehicle not to start or damage to the battery This would not be covered by the warranty Always unplug all electrical devices when turning off the vehicle Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with the accessory power outlets and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses If you experience a problem see your dealer retailer for additional information on the accessory power outlet Notice Adding any electrical equipment to the vehicle can damage it or keep other components from working as they should The repairs would not be covered by the veh
146. d To raise the seatback do the following 1 Lift up fully on the recliner lever located on the outboard side of the seat and push up on the seatback 2 Continue raising the seatback until the seatback re engages A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked in place The recliner lever is also used to recline the seatback while a passenger is seated See Manual Reclining Seatbacks on page 1 5 Rear Seats A CAUTION Split Folding Rear Seat A safety belt that is improperly routed not properly The rear split bench seatbacks have three available attached or twisted will not provide the protection positions folded forward upright or partially reclined i Both of the seatbacks can be moved to any of the three positions independent of the other seatback position The rear bench seat can also be moved forward and rearward needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seatback always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted To fold the seatback down do the following A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move Notice Folding a rear seat with the safe
147. d for example when the brake linings wear down and new ones are installed be sure to get new approved replacement parts If this is not done the brakes might not work properly For example if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle the balance between the front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed Battery This vehicle has a maintenance free battery When it is time for a new battery see your dealer retailer for one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label For battery replacement see your dealer retailer or the service manual To purchase a service manual see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 17 Warning Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Vehicle Storage A CAUTION Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you are not careful See Jump Starting on page 5 36 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt Infrequent Usage If the vehicle is driven infrequently remove the black negative cable from the battery This helps keep the battery from running down Extended Storage For extended storage of th
148. d Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to geta pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label no further adjustment is necessary If the inflation pressure is low add air until you reach the recommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Re check the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture 5 59 High Speed Operation A CAUTION Driving at high speeds 100 mph 160 km h or higher puts an additional strain on tires Sustained high speed driving causes excessive heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure You could have a crash and you or others could be killed Some high speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high speed operation When speed limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle can be driven at high speeds make sure the tires are rated for high speed operation in excellent condition and set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load 5 60 If your vehicle has P235 50R18 size tir
149. d frustration But even in three fourths of a second a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergency so keeping enough space between the vehicle and others is important 4 4 And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the condition of the road whether it is wet dry or icy tire tread the condition of the brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some people drive in spurts heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake The brakes might not have time to cool between hard stops The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot of heavy braking Keeping pace with the traffic and allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven brake normally but do not pump the brakes If the brakes are pumped the pedal could get harder to push down If the engine stops there will still be some power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied Once the power assist is used up it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessories
150. d make sure these are used All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer retailer Scheduled Maintenance When the change engine oil light and or CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays service is required for the vehicle Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if driving under the best conditions the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year However the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally service the vehicle within 3 000 miles 5 000 km since the last service Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 18 for information on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system When the change engine oil light and or CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message appears certain services checks and inspections are required Required services are described in the following for Maintenance I and Maintenance II Generally it is recommended that the first service be Maintenance I the second service be Maintena
151. d restraint and in between the headrest or head restraint posts 3 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure 1 48 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle If the child restraint has the LATCH system see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 42 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 42 for top tether anchor locations Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat be
152. d speed when the reduced engine power light is on but acceleration and speed may be reduced The performance may be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle If this light stays on see your dealer retailer as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair Highbeam On Light This light comes on when the high beam headlamps are in use See Headlamp High Low Beam Changer on page 3 8 for more information Service All Wheel Drive Light This light is located in the center of your instrument panel cluster This light and the SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE message in the Driver Information Center DIC will come on and stay on to indicate that there may be a problem with the drive system and service is required See All Wheel Drive AWD System on page 4 9 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 for more information All Wheel Drive Disabled Light This light will come on when the rear drive system is overheating An ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF message will appear in the Driver Information Center DIC too This light will turn off when the rear drive system cools down If this light stays on for a while you need to reset the light To reset the light turn the ignition off and then back on again If the light stays on see your dealer retailer right away See All Wheel Drive on page 5 41 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 for more information 3 39 Gate Ajar Light ay If this light comes on your liftgate is not c
153. d tire face down on the load floor with the threaded wheel stow rod sticking up through the center hole of the wheel 8 Install the nut onto the wheel stow rod and tighten 9 Install the rear compartment storage panel cover in the middle position See Rear Compartment Storage Panel Cover on page 2 45 for more information The compact spare is for temporary use only Replace the compact spare tire with a full size tire as soon 5 Screw the threaded wheel stow rod onto the spare as YOUPCan tire bracket The final position of the wheel stow rod must be turned to the farthest forward position 5 86 Compact Spare Tire A CAUTION Driving with more than one compact spare tire at a time could result in loss of braking and handling This could lead to a crash and you or others could be injured Use only one compact spare tire at a time Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when the vehicle was new it can lose air after a time Check the inflation pressure regularly It should be 60 psi 420 kPa After installing the compact spare on the vehicle stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly inflated The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph 105 km h for distances up to 3 000 miles 5 000 km so you can finish your trip and have the full size tire repaired or replaced at your convenience Of course it is best to replace the spare with a full size tire as
154. deactivated Press the OnStar button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active 2 42 Storage Areas Glove Box To open the glove box pull the handle to the left and pull the glove box door down until it stops and is fully open Cupholders Cupholders are located on the lower front of the center console Pull out cupholders are located at the bottom of the armrest and on the back of the rear seat center console Cupholders are also located on the rear seat armrest Center Console Storage For vehicles with a center console storage area open with the lever on the front of the console Luggage Carrier A CAUTION If something is carried on top of the vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage carrier like paneling plywood or a mattress the wind can catch it while the vehicle is being driven This can cause a driver to lose control The item being carried could be violently torn off and this could cause a collision and damage the vehicle Items may be carried inside Never carry something longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of the vehicle For vehicles with a luggage carrier it allows for things to be loaded on top of the vehicle The luggage carrier has side rails attached to the roof sliding crossrails if equipped and places to use for tying things down These allow for some things to be loaded on top of the vehicle as long as objects are not wider or longer than the luggage carrie
155. dealer retailer if service is required Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission P Park Mechanism Check A CAUTION When you are doing this check the vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and the transmission in N Neutral slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only To check the P Park mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to P Park Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Contact your dealer retailer if service is required Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer retailer Usage Fluid Lubricant Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Ins
156. deploy under some unusual circumstance even though the airbag is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint we recommend that rear facing child restraints not be transported in your vehicle even if the airbag is off The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag if The right front passenger seat is unoccupied The system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat The system determines that a small child is present in a child restraint The system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat A right front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time The right front passenger seat is occupied by a smaller person such as a child who has outgrown child restraints Or if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on pag
157. der belt or by the LATCH system See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 42 for more information A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle even when no child is in it Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint A CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint 1 39 Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant or a child riding in a rear facing child restraint a child riding in a forward facing child seat an older child riding ina booster seat and children who are large enough using safety be
158. der turns than normal Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance 4 39 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps also flash telling other drivers the vehicle is turning changing lanes or stopping When towing a trailer the arrows on the instrument panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out For this reason you may think other drivers are seeing the signal when they are not It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downgrade If the transmission is not shifted down the brakes might have to be used so much that they would get hot and no longer work well On along uphill grade shift down and reduce the vehicle s speed to around 45 mph 70 km h to reduce the possibility of the engine and the transmission overheating Vehicles can tow in D Drive Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and or hilly conditions 4 40 When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades consider the following Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes If the engine is tu
159. ders 8 Cruise Control E Tire Pressure Monitor E Engine Coolant Temperature gt Traction Control Exterior Lamps amp Windshield Washer Fluid QO Fog Lamps Section 1 Seats and Restraint System Front Seats 0 0 0 0 ccceeeeeeee eects eee eeeeeneeeeeneees 1 2 Manual Seats sinciera herr kel ER ALDER 1 2 Seat Height Adjuster W u ssseseeerererenrerernee 1 3 Power Seat cccceceeeeceee cence eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 1 3 Manual Lumbar veccecascseseoc sesane 1 4 Heated Seats 2 0 00 ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeaeeneeeees 1 4 Manual Reclining Seatbacks eeeeeee ees 1 5 Head Restraints sn ran enhe Eben ner aana 1 7 Passenger Folding Seatback u ssseererererrree 1 8 Rear Seats ercer eenia sa eisa hoben 1 10 Split Folding Rear Seat ceeeeeeeeeeee eens 1 10 Safety BENS vcchelscciiwetedate lanes 1 12 Safety Belts They Are for Everyone 1 12 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 17 Lap Shoulder Belt roterer kende 1 25 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy 1 30 Safety Belt Extender cccceeeeeeeeeneee tenes 1 30 Child Restraints cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 1 31 Older Children ccccceeceeeececeeeeeeeeeeaeees 1 31 Infants and Young Children ceeeeeeee ees 1 34 Child Restraint Systems cceeeeeeeeeneee tenes 1 37 Where to Put the Restrai
160. dicators 3 24 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages 6 eeeeeeee 3 49 Hazard Warning Flashers ances 3 6 Safety and Symbols cceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeees iii 14 Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance o c 5 72 Different SIZE erreurs es etyeds Mate EEEE 5 70 Replacement ieccissc sascccccas bleer ea nains 5 72 When It Is Time for New Tires lacc 5 67 Where to Put the Child Restraint 005 1 40 WVING OWS re E DUER EGER REE 2 14 POWET ess eda e EE ES eee adaees 2 15 Windshield Washed EEN a a EE FE EEE ARREDI 3 9 Washer Fluid sorrisi ideerne T 5 31 Wiper Blade Replacement 2222224 aan ns menes 5 49 Wiper Blades Cleaning ceeeeeeneee eee 5 93 Wiper FUSES scsincecacdcencates inise anen denin 5 97 WIPGIS 2 cies icicade pie aber ae ho bs ede EEEE 3 8 Winter Driving al a EENE 4 17 Wipers Rear Washer 2 c2si scisesess caceeteenedsdosnadetiaancae 3 10 XM Radio Messages ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 96 Your Vehicle and the Environment 0 6 2
161. dirt Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of the interior and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non uniform manner Some commercial products may increase gloss on the instrument panel The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry A CAUTION Do not bleach or dye safety belts It may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather frequent application may be required See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve the vehicle s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often Notice Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle Check the cleaning product label
162. djust the drivers seat only when the vehicle is not moving A CAUTION If either seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked Driver s Seat shown Passenger Seat similar To adjust the seatback lift the lever on the outboard side of the seat and move the seatback to the desired position Then release the lever to lock the seatback in place If the passenger s seat is a flat folding seat fully raise the lever to disengage the seatback A CAUTION Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous Even when buckled up the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined like this The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be against your body Instead it will be in front of you In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt cannot do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving 1 6 Head Restraints Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint i
163. dow open Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 2 35 4 38 Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself Before starting check all trailer hitch parts and attachments safety chains electrical connectors lamps tires and mirror adjustments If the trailer has electric brakes start the vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This checks the electrical connection at the same time During the trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working Electronic Trailer Sway Control Electronic Trailer Sway Control is integrated into the StabiliTrak system of the vehicle This feature detects the occurrence of trailer sway that may be caused by improper trailer weight balance or excessive vehicle speed When the system detects trailer sway the StabiliTrak syst
164. e Bluetooth system it will be retained indefinitely This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and phone pairing information For information on how to delete this information see the above sections on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags 3 107 Other Information The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by General Motors is under license Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 3 108 Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system The RSE system works with the vehicle s audio system The DVD player is part of the front radio The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player a vide
165. e 3 29 The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on may inflate the right front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active For some children who have outgrown child restraints and for very small adults the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag depending upon the person s seating posture and body build Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system To help avoid injury to yourself or others have the vehicle serviced right away See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 28 for more information including important safety information 1 65 If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child If the Off Indicator is Lit for an Restraint Adult Size Occupant If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit 1 Turn the vehicle off 2 Remove the child restraint from the vehicle 3 Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massag
166. e DIC The default settings for the personalization features were set when your vehicle left the factory but may have been changed from their default state since then The personalization preferences are automatically recalled To change personalization preferences use the following procedure Entering the Feature Settings Menu 1 Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in P Park To avoid excessive drain on the battery it is recommended that the headlamps are turned off 2 Press the vehicle information button until FEATURE SETTNGS Settings PRESS V TO SELCT Select appears on the DIC display 3 Press the set reset button to enter the feature settings menu If the menu is not available FEATURE SETTNGS Settings AVAILABLE IN PRK Park will display Before entering the menu make sure the vehicle is in P Park Feature Settings Menu Items The following are personalization features that allow you to program settings to the vehicle DISPLAY ENGLISH This feature will only display if a language other than English has been set This feature allows you to change the language in which the DIC messages appear to English Press the vehicle information button until the PRESS V TO DISPLAY ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to display all DIC messages in English 3 57 DISPLAY LANG Language This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will ap
167. e Location Assistance Remote Door Unlock Vehicle Alert OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics OnStar Hands Free Calling with 30 trial minutes OnStar Virtual Advisor U S Only OnStar Services Included with Directions amp Connections Plan All Safe and Sound Plan Services OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation If equipped or Driving Directions Advisor delivered RideAssist Information and Convenience Services 2 40 OnStar Hands Free Calling OnStar Hands Free Calling allows eligible OnStar subscribers to make and receive calls using voice commands Hands Free Calling is fully integrated into the vehicle and can be used with OnStar Pre Paid Minute Packages Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes good for 60 days Hands Free Calling can also be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U S or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada depending on eligibility To find out more refer to the OnStar Owner s Guide in the vehicle s glove box visit onstar com or onstar ca or speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation Vehicles with the OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation system can provide voice guided driving directions Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor locate a business or address and download driving directions to the vehicle Voice guided directions to the desired destination will play thr
168. e airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving your airbag system may not work properly Have your vehicle serviced right away 3 28 A CAUTION If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving it means the airbag system might not be working properly The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury have the vehicle serviced right away The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you start the engine If the light does not come on then have it fixed immediately If there is a problem with the airbag system an airbag Driver Information Center DIC message may also come on See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 for more information Passenger Airbag Status Indicator The vehicle has the passenger sensing system See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 63 for important safety information The instrument panel has a passenger airbag status indicator PASSENGER AIRBAG A ON OFF 2 LAES oe No2 United States Canada When the vehicle is started the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off for several seconds as a system check Then after several more seconds the status indicator will light either ON or OFF or either the on or off symbol to let
169. e are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits e use the recommended fuel See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 should be performed when indicated See Additional Required Services on page 6 7 and Maintenance Footnotes on page 6 8 for further information A CAUTION Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt see your dealer retailer to have a qualified technician do the work See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5 4 Some maintenance services can be complex So unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment have your dealer retailer do these jobs When you go to your dealer retailer for service trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine parts To purchase service information see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7 17 Owner Checks and Services on page 6 10 tells what should be checked when to check it and what can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition The proper replacement parts fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 15 When the vehicle is service
170. e disc is stored in the radio The radio does not resume play of the disc automatically If the RSA system is sourced to the DVD the movie when reloaded into the DVD player begins to play again In case loading and reading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold the 4 DVD button more than 5 seconds to force the disc to eject DVD Radio Error Messages Player Error This message displays when there are disc load or eject problems Disc Format Error This message displays if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up or if the disc is damaged Disc Region Error This message displays if the disc is not from a correct region No Disc Inserted This message displays if no disc is present when the A or DVD CD AUX button is pressed on the radio Using the Auxiliary Input Jack The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate This is not an audio output do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack An external audio device such as an iPod laptop computer MP3 player CD changer etc can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio listening Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in P Park See Defensive Driving on page 4 2 for more information on driver distraction To use a portable audio player connect a 3 5 mm 1 8
171. e ea teers 4 34 YOUR VehIGle sccsecstrexiAcieessiieeeadiviecseiSecateneces 4 27 Traction Control System TCS eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee ees 4 7 Control System Warning Light 3 32 StabiliTrak System cccccccccssssssssseeeeeeeeees 4 6 Transmission Fluid Automatic c cece ec eee eee eeeeeeeeeneeeees 5 21 Transmission Operation Automatic 2 24 2 27 Transportation Program Courtesy 06 7 11 Trip Odometer sisisi ninn aeria inh 3 26 Turn and Lane Change Signals eeeee 3 7 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever cseeeee ee 3 7 Uniform Tire Quality Grading cceeeeeeeeeeee 5 71 13 Vehicle CS OMMMON as seecc ee aces test ET E sentences 4 4 LOAGING Ee E E 4 21 Running While Parked eeeeeeeeeeee eens 2 36 Service Soon Light ceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 40 SYMB E ea hls Lederne pe ERA EE ER iii Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 7 18 Vehicle Data Recording Radio Frequency RFID xp career deres 7 19 Vehicle Identification Number VIN gcscscitais tec cise sine raide edad 5 96 Service Parts Identification Label 5 96 Vehicle Personalization DIG Serre eo renees 3 57 Vehicle Remote Start W ssssssseeeeeeeeereernrnee 2 7 Ventilation Adjustment W u ssseeeeeererererenenee 3 23 MISONS cc2ctanchatsangrecacicarecd E 2 16 Warning Lights Gages and In
172. e fuel pump unattended when refueling the vehicle This is against the law in some places Do not re enter the vehicle while pumping fuel Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the passenger side of the vehicle To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly counterclockwise The fuel cap has a spring in it if the cap is released too soon it will spring back to the right A CAUTION Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could be badly burned This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill fuel Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5 91 When replacing the fuel cap turn it clockwise until it clicks Make sure the cap is fully installed The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 34 A CAUTION If a fire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel b
173. e grounds to jump start your vehicle 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you do not want You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transmission in P PARK or a manual transmission in N Neutral before setting the parking brake Notice If you leave the radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure they could be damaged The repairs would not be covered by the warranty Always turn off the radio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries And it could save your radio 4 Open the hoods and locate the positive and 5 To remove the fuse block cover push in the two negative terminal locations on each vehicle locking tabs located on the rear of the cover and lift You will not need to access your battery for jump starting Your vehicle has a remote positive and a remote negative jump starting terminal for
174. e oil light or CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being turned on reset the system 1 Turn the ignition key to ON RUN with the engine off 2 Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds The change engine oil light will flash while the system is resetting 3 When the light stops flashing turn the key to LOCK OFF If the light or message comes back on and stays on when the vehicle is started the engine oil life system has not reset Repeat the procedure What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products Used oil can be a threat to the environment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Recycle it by taking it toa place that collects used oil Engine Air Cleaner Filter The engine air cleaner filter is located in the engine compartment on the passenger s side of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on location When to Inspect
175. e or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also see Checking the Restraint Systems on page 1 70 f Lubricate all key lock cylinders hood latch assemblies secondary latches pivots spring anchor and release pawl hood and door hinges rear folding seats and liftgate hinges More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak g f driving regularly under dusty conditions the filter may require replacement more often h Change automatic transmission fluid if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer towing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service i Drain flush and refill cooling system This service can be complex you should have your dealer retailer perform this service See Engine Coolant on page 5 23 for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pressure cap and filler neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap j Check system for interference or binding and for damaged or missing parts Repla
176. e or decrease the setting The display shows the current bass or treble level If a station s frequency is weak or if there is static decrease the treble Setting the Tone Bass Treble BASS MID TREB Bass Midrange or Treble To adjust bass midrange or treble press the Jd knob until the tone control tabs display Continue pressing to highlight the desired tab or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired tab Turn the Jd knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing the SEEK arrows bb FWD forward or lt lt REV reverse button until the desired levels are obtained If a station s frequency is weak or if there is static decrease the treble To quickly adjust bass midrange or treble to the middle position press the pushbutton positioned under the BASS MID or TREB tab for more than two seconds A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle position press the Jd knob for more than two seconds until a beep sounds EQ Equalization Press to select preset equalization settings To return to the manual mode press the EQ button until Manual displays or starts to manually adjust the bass midrange or treble by pressing the d knob EQ Equalization Radio with CD and DVD Press to choose bass and treble equalization settings designed for differen
177. e the transmission Shift to P Park only when the vehicle is stopped 2 21 Starting Procedure 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal turn the ignition to START When the engine starts let go of the key The idle speed will slow down as the engine warms Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts The vehicle has a Computer Controlled Cranking System This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components If the ignition key is turned to the START position and then released when the engine begins cranking the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts 2 If the engine does not start after 5 10 seconds especially in very cold weather below 0 F or 18 C it could be flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to allow the cranking motor to cool down When the engine starts let go of the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again repeat these steps This clears the extra gasoline from the engine Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts If the en
178. e vehicle remove the black negative cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger This helps maintain the charge of the battery over an extended period of time All doors and the liftgate must be closed before reconnecting the battery After reconnecting the battery press the unlock button on the keyless access transmitter Failure to follow this procedure could result in the alarm sounding Pressing unlock on the keyless access transmitter will stop the alarm 5 35 Jump Starting If your battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely A CAUTION Batteries can hurt you They can be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you Notice gnoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the warranty Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work and it could damage the vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system 5 36 Notice If the other vehicle s system is not a 12 volt system with a negative ground both vehicles can be damaged Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems with negativ
179. e your vehicle to your dealer retailer 5 21 Cooling System The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the AA CAUTION correct working temperature An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan A CAUTION Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned CAUTION Continued A Electric Engine Cooling Fans B Coolant Surge Tank 5 22 CAUTION Continued Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle Notice Using coolant other than DEX COOL can cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addition the engine coolant could require changing sooner at 30 000 miles 50 000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free coolant in the vehicle Engine Coolant The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first The following explains the cooling system and how to ch
180. eadphones illuminates If the light does not illuminate the batteries might need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section for more information Switch the headphones to OFF when not in use The infrared transmitters are located in the display below the video screen The headphones shut off automatically to save the battery power if the RSE system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones are out of range of the transmitters for more than three minutes If you move too far forward or step out of the vehicle the headphones lose the audio signal To adjust the volume on the headphones use the volume control located on the right side For optimal audio performance the headphones must be worn correctly Headphones should be worn with headband over the top of the head for best audio reception The symbol L Left appears on the upper left side above the ear pad and should be positioned on the left ear The symbol R Right appears on the upper right side above the ear pad and should be positioned on the right ear Notice Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight This could damage the headphones and repairs will not be covered by the warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries Keep the headphones stored in a cool dry place The foam ear pads attached to the headphones can become worn or damaged if they are not handled or stored properly If the foam ear pads do become damaged
181. eave enough room up ahead to stop even with ABS Using ABS Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let antilock work The antilock pump or motor might be heard operating and the brake pedal might be felt to pulsate but this is normal Braking in Emergencies ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help more than even the very best braking Brake Assist This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving conditions This feature uses the stability system hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power brake system under conditions where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle The stability system hydraulic brake control module increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased StabiliTrak System The vehicle has the StabiliTrak system an advanced computer controlled system that helps the driver maintain directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions
182. eck and add coolant when it is low If there is a problem with engine overheating see Engine Overheating on page 5 28 5 23 What to Use Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant If using this mixture nothing else needs to be added This mixture Z CAUTION e Gives freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C outside temperature Adding only plain water to the cooling system can e Gives boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid engine temperature such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant Protects against rust and corrosion mixture will The vehicle s coolant warning system Will not damage aluminum parts is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture the engine could get e Helps keep the proper engine temperature too hot but you would not get the overheat warning The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant 5 24 Notice If an improper coolant mixture is used the engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Notice If extra inhibitors and or additives are used in the vehicle s cooling system the vehicle could be damaged Use only the proper mixtu
183. ed in the United States or kilometers used in Canada Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer The digital odometer will read 999 999 if someone tries to turn it back You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer then it must be If not then it is set at zero and a label must be put on the driver s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed 3 26 Trip Odometer Your trip odometer is located in the Driver Information Center and shows how far your vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was last reset For more information see DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 42 Tachometer The tachometer shows your engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm Notice If the engine is operated with the tachometer in the solid red area the vehicle could be damaged The damages would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not operate the engine in the solid red area Safety Belt Reminders Safety Belt Reminder Light When the engine is started a chime sounds for several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety belt unless the driver safety belt is already buckled The safety belt light comes on and stays on for several seconds then flashes for several more This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion If the driver safety be
184. eeeeeee eens 3 18 Circuit Breakers cccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 97 Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels 5 94 Exterior Lamps Lenses s ceeeeeeeeeeeee tees 5 92 Fabric Carpet isco snien penaa ciation HEGER ER ad 5 89 Finish Care siccudevees ae or erne eian 5 92 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een ees 5 90 INCGNOR ani eaea aE A ee EEE EA 5 88 Cleaning cont re RER e nea enra E E ER 5 90 TOS eea E caated 5 94 Underbody Maintenance G G G sssssseeererern ennen 5 95 Washing Your Vehicle aeceeescsnenenrrnn 5 91 WeatherstipS acc rande gro Erde aa 5 91 Windshield and Wiper Blades 000 5 93 Climate Control System cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 3 19 Outlet Adjustment 2 00 00 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 3 23 Clock Setting ccceceececeecece sence eeeeeeeeeaeees 3 65 Collision Damage Repair 0 seeeeeeeeees 7 13 Compact Spare Tire cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaes 5 87 Compass wsasiasidvsdivensrasiesyiasianevienclesgecsakleeeeeses 3 47 Content Theft Deterrent ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tenes 2 17 Control of a Vehicle ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee renerne 4 4 Convenience Net cceeeeeeeeeeeneea een eeaeeaeeaes 2 48 Coolant ENGIN ersan a a bess E 5 23 Engine Temperature Gage eeeeeeeeneee ees 3 33 Engine Temperature Warning Light
185. eeeeeeeeeeees 3 117 Range Adjustment Headlamps 00 1 7 Rear Compartment Storage Panel Cover 2 45 Rear Door Security LOCKS c eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 11 Rear Seat Armrest cccceeeceeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeneees 2 47 Rear Seat Entertainment System 00 3 108 Rear Window Washer Wiper eeeeeeeeeee 3 10 Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming 2 37 Rearview Mirrors 20 0 cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 37 Reclining Seatbacks Manual eeeeees Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Recreational Vehicle Towing Reduced Engine Power Light Reimbursement Program GM Mobility Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation Remote Vehicle Start Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 552222 24 ke ra stad ews peace Removing the Spare Tire and Tools W 1 1 1 1 1 1 Replacement Bulbs Replacement Parts Maintenance Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government c eeeeeeeeeeeee eens Reporting Safety Defects to the U S Government seccina inai Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash Retained Accessory Power RAP ecce Roadside Assistance Program Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out
186. eeeeeeeeees 3 14 Traction Control System TCS Warning Light 3 32 Fog Lamps DO 3 15 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light 3 32 Instrument Panel Brightness eeeee 3 15 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage 0 00 3 33 Dome Lamp 2 0 eeeeeeeeeee tet teeter etetettee 3 16 Tire Pressure Light ccccccccceeseseseeeeeeeees 3 33 Entry HIQHUM geere eoa a a e ae 3 16 Malfunction Indicator Lamp 3 34 Map Lamps sed ei ane en in EEn SE 3 16 Oil Pressure Light US Canada 3 36 Cargo LAMP 2ecccsicltenestonsel aca ania tienes 3 16 Change Engine Oil Light ce 3 37 Electric Power Management se 3 17 Security Light assisi tare acas apani esee 3 37 Battery Run Down Protection snes 3 17 Fog Lamp Light cara vcaccanncccestace SuseusincconasGuncwnaces 3 37 Accessory Power Outlet s scenerne 3 18 Cruise Control Light siisi iraire 3 38 Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter 04 3 18 Reduced Engine Power Light 0 010 3 38 Section 3 Highbeam On Light eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 38 Service All Wheel Drive Light ee 3 39 All Wheel Drive Disabled Light 0 3 39 Gate Ajar LIGAER oe EU eeeeeeeeeaes 3 40 Door Ajar Light tsaciiwecte tes iceos aa aI 3 40 Service Vehicle Soon Light eeeeeeeeee ee 3 40 FUG Gage seit caierteacicatcseaaedncsnkdeanteadataeetaet 3 40 Low Fuel Wa
187. eeeeeeeeeseeeeeaees 1 4 Maintenance FOOIOIES cioran EE 6 8 Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services 6 0eeeee 6 7 At Each Fuel Fill ccce 6 10 At Least Once a Month ccccceeeeeeeee ee 6 11 At Least Once a Year cccc cece eeceee ee eeeeeeee 6 11 Maintenance Record cccceeeee eee eeeeeeeeee 6 17 Maintenance Replacement Parts 6 15 Maintenance Schedule cont Maintenance Requirements eeeeeeeee ee 6 2 Owner Checks and Services cccceceeeees 6 10 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 6 13 Scheduled Maintenance ccccceeeeeeeeeees 6 4 USING ieor se a A N T nee 6 2 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 2 Malfunction Indicator Lamp s e 3 34 Manual Lumbar Controls cccccceceeeeeeeeeees 1 4 Manual Reclining Seatbacks eeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 5 Manual S ats esci EN 1 2 Map AMPS rese leret 3 16 Message DIC Warnings and Messages eeeeeeeeee 3 49 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview eccere 2 37 Manual Rearview Mirror ceceeeeeeeeeeees 2 37 Outside Convex Mirrors cc cece cece cece eee ees 2 38 Outside Power Mirrors ccccceeeeceeeeeeeees 2 38 MPS Sacra iee set seesanacieneatasates 3 86 3 91 Navigation System Privacy ceeeeeeeeeeee ees 7 19 Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual
188. eeeeees 5 52 Tire Terminology and Definitions 04 5 55 Inflation Tire Pressure cseeeeeeeeeee eee es 5 58 High Speed Operation ceeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 5 60 Tire Pressure Monitor System 1 5 61 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 0 Tire Inspection and Rotation eee When It Is Time for New Tires 0 065 Buying NEW Tires csscccccecadenadtee aedstaeweterenownciens Different Size Tires and Wheels 0 0000 Uniform Tire Quality Grading eeeeeeeeeees Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance Wheel Replacement eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Tike CHAINS v2 0 cccssceceicesseceiaeddecasedsveerssoresenserne Ifa Tire Goes Flat crcire iasi Changing a Flat Tire cceeeeeeeeeee teeter eee Removing the Spare Tire and Tools Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire cececececeeeceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeees Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools Compact Spare Tire cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens Appearance Care ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeee ees Interior Cleaning sanserne Fabric Carpet zaren bese aneii anas Leather nr de rss Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees Care of Safety Belts ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee es 5 91 Weathersttips i cceccccs
189. eel from right to left while turning the key to ACC ACCESSORY If this does not work then the vehicle needs service ACC ACC ACCESSORY This is the position in which you can operate some electrical accessories ON RUN This position can be used to operate the electrical accessories and to display some instrument panel cluster warning and indicator lights The switch stays in this position when the engine is running If you leave the key in the ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN position with the engine off the battery could be drained You may not be able to start the vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time Q START This is the position that starts the engine When the engine starts release the key The ignition switch returns to ON RUN for driving Retained Accessory Power RAP These vehicle accessories can be used for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off e Audio System e Power Windows Sunroof if equipped Power to these accessories will continue to operate for up to 10 minutes or until the driver door is opened All these features will work when the key is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY Starting the Engine Move the shift lever to P Park or N Neutral The engine will not start in any other position To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving use N Neutral only Notice Do not try to shift to P Park if the vehicle is moving If you do you could damag
190. eem ater 3 15 Cl ER 2 22 cede ea aa aE E EEE 3 25 OVGEIVICW se 55ctas dapin EEES 3 4 INMFOQUCUON Di 0 arr eE KANE 6 2 JUMP Starting eeina eainiie as 5 36 Keyless Entry Remote Operation 008 2 5 Keyless Entry System ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 2 4 CS SER a Laat pone oearedial BEDE SEES SEE BESS 2 3 Labeling Tire Sidewall cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 52 Lamp Malfunction Indicator 42 55 kelte bier 3 34 Lamps CAR SEE ea E 3 16 Daytime Running DRL cece eee eee es 3 14 DOME seeden iiaa nere bear 3 16 License Plate 32233 andres canes EEN 5 48 Map ES EE SER Se AKSE Eee SEE T N oan 3 16 Lap Shoulder Belt u u ds seernes enke nenen 1 25 LATCH System for Child Restraints 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 42 Liftgate Carbon Monoxide cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een eees 2 12 Lighting NU E E E A E T 3 16 ET 0 2 F RRE BEER SEER eaaa aaa AE E 3 13 Airbag Readiness ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 3 28 All Wheel Drive Disabled ceeeeeeeee ee 3 39 Antilock Brake System ABS Warning 3 31 Lights cont Brake System Warning 0 cseeeeeneeeeee teers 3 30 Change Engine Oil siescisscesterieeeehsieeestca seers 3 37 Charging System cceeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeeees 3 30 Cruise Control earren aaan 3 38 DOOr Alan cironi me otic eiiinn dete es 3 40 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning 3 32 Flaske
191. een the tires and the road creating less traction or grip Wet ice can occur at about 32 F 0 C when freezing rain begins to fall resulting in even less traction Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand Drive with caution whatever the condition Accelerate gently so traction is not lost Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick so there is even less traction Try not to break the fragile traction If you accelerate too fast the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more The Traction Control System TCS on page 4 7 improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads but slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions When driving through deep snow turn off the traction control system to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds The Antilock Brake System ABS on page 4 5 improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement Allow greater following distance on any slippery road and watch for slippery spots Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice Turn off cruise control if equipped on slippery surfaces Blizzard Conditions Being stuck i
192. ehicle Bluetooth system See gm com bluetooth for more information on compatible phones Voice Recognition The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags Noise Keep interior noise levels to a minimum The system may not recognize voice commands if there is too much background noise When to Speak A short tone sounds after the system responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice command Wait until the tone and then speak How to Speak Speak clearly in a calm and natural voice Audio System When using the in vehicle Bluetooth system sound comes through the vehicle s front audio system speakers and overrides the audio system Use the audio system volume knob during a call to change the volume level The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later calls To prevent missed calls a minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned down too low 3 97 Bluetooth Controls Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to operate the in vehicle Bluetooth system See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 117 for more information 6 we Push To Talk Press to answer incoming calls to confirm system information and to start speech recognition CR V Phone On Hook Press to end a call reject a call or to cancel an operation Pairing A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the in vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
193. ehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle When a low tire pressure condition is detected the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light located on the instrument panel cluster At the same time a message to check the pressure ina specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center DIC display The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure Using the DIC tire pressure levels can be viewed by the driver For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 42 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you start to drive This could be an early indicator that the air pressure in the tire s are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure A Tire and Loading Information label attached to your vehicle shows the size of your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correc
194. ehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation DOT motor vehicle safety standards The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 5 56 Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The
195. ei 2 31 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 3 29 Passenger Compartment Air Filter 3 23 Passenger Sensing System ceeeeeeeeee tees 1 63 PASSING seneni paa teia ran dr iaai 4 12 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer 2 17 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation arrene eh N davies 2 18 Perchlorate Materials Requirements California 5 4 Phone BIUSLOOUA ajisa aaa 3 97 Power Door LOCKS orrore aaraa ENNE 2 10 Reduced Engine Light W W sssssesssereerrern nens 3 38 Retained Accessory RAP cecce 2 21 SE Ha een aa 1 3 Steering Fluid Wu Wu u Xu dc sseeeereeeeee ennen enken 5 30 MIN dOWS gt arenaen Eee 2 15 Pregnancy Using Safety Belts u sseeeere 1 30 10 PRIVACY pnsan an uana ae 7 18 Navigation System cceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 19 OMSAT 55 E E T 7 19 Radio Frequency Identification RFID 7 19 Program Courtesy Transportation cceceeeeeeeeeees 7 11 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 11 Proposition 65 Warning California 5 4 Radio Frequency Identification RFID Privacy 7 19 Radio s ccs2cccesteestda narena a aiae 3 67 Radios Navigation Radio System see Navigation Manual aaee 3 97 Recepto s iincacectviiis wedsciecastiebeateomanoereenes 3 118 Setting the Clk siirsin rennene 3 65 Theft Deterrent c cceceeeeeee
196. em may begin to apply the front brakes without you pressing the brake pedal to help in stabilizing the vehicle The StabiliTrak warning light will flash to indicate that vehicle speed should be reduced If the trailer continues to sway StabiliTrak will reduce engine torque as a method to reduce the speed of the vehicle Reducing the speed of the vehicle is necessary to reduce trailer sway Electronic Trailer Sway Control is de activated when StabiliTrak is turned off and is re activated when it is turned back on See StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer This can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer Because the rig is longer it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns Notice Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle The vehicle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When turning with a trailer make wi
197. enance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 How to Check Lubricant ha AWD Differential Case for 3 4L and 3 6L V6 Models A Fill Plug B Drain Plug To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be ona level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole A fluid loss could indicate a problem check and have it repaired if needed What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Headlamp Aiming Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment However if your vehicle is damaged in a crash the headlamp aim may be affected Aim adjustment to the low beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming drivers flash their high beam headlamps at you for vertical aim If the headlamps need to be re aimed it is recommended that you take the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service 5 43 Bulb Replacement Headlamps Front Turn Signal For the proper type of replacement bulbs see Sidemarker and Parking Lamps Replacement Bulbs on page 5 49 To replace one of these bulbs For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this i section contact y
198. ene niio 2 21 SIGGKiING asier nain a aE E EEEE 4 10 Steering Wheel Controls Audio 065 3 117 Steering Wheel Tilt Wheel 0 cceeeeee eee 3 6 Storage Areas Center Console c ccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 42 Convenience Net 0cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 48 Gupholdets ala alen ive aratan 2 42 GIOVE BOX sci scnisecetcddecut ates cduantanseedanwogecweandions 2 42 Luggage Carrier Sessoseierircui rinsio tancanna aisa 2 43 Rear Compartment Storage Panel Cover 2 45 Rear Seat Armrest cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 47 WADING E ehiadatadentiasieseesbs 2 47 Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or SNOW 1 4 20 SUM VISOL S igara Aohecacetietsncldaseedsenchasatic NA ele 2 16 SUMOO eeii aE oR EEE iE 2 49 Table rotarum anaE E A E 2 47 Tachometer 2 cccceeeeeeeecececeeeeeteseeeeeaeaees 3 26 Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back up Lamps 5 47 Text Telephone TTY Users c eceeeeeeeeees 7 6 Theft Deterrent Feature ccececeeeeeeeee ees 3 117 Theft Deterrent Systems cceeeeeee teense eee ees 2 16 Content Theft Deterrent ceeeeeeeeeee teens 2 17 PASS Key IIl Electronic Immobilizer 2 17 PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation 2 522 catcecciwcnelbiceccdtaniand daciebincibeueese 2 18 TEAK se E iE 3 6 Time Setting seccina 3 65 Tire Pressure Lights iccccrsateaccagesdieeds iinis nien
199. eplacement transmitter is programmed to the vehicle all remaining transmitters must also be programmed Any lost or stolen transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed Each vehicle can have up to four transmitters programmed to it See Learn Remote Key under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 42 2 6 Battery Replacement Notice When replacing the battery do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter Static from your body could damage the transmitter To replace the battery 1 Separate the transmitter with a flat thin object inserted into the notch on the side 2 Remove the old battery Do not use a metal object 3 Insert the new battery positive side facing down Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery 4 Snap the transmitter back together Remote Vehicle Start Your vehicle may have the remote start feature This feature allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle See REMOTE START under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 57 for instructions on how to enable and disable this feature During a remote start the climate control system will turn on at the fan temperature and mode settings the vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off The rear window defogger will also turn on If your vehicle has heated seats they may turn on during colder outside temperatures and will shut off when the key is turned to ON RUN You may not not
200. equipment collision parts If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier consider switching to another insurance carrier If your vehicle is leased the leasing company may require you to have insurance that assures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer OEM parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts Read your lease carefully as you may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs If a Crash Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash Check to make sure that you are all right If you are uninjured make sure that no one else in your vehicle or the other vehicle is injured If there has been an injury call emergency services for help Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police officer Give only the necessary and requested information to police and other parties involved in the crash Do not discuss your personal condition mental frame of mind or anything unrelated to the crash This will help guard against post crash legal action If you need roadside assistance call GM Roadside Assistance See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 for more information If your vehicle cannot be driven know where the towing service will be taking it Get a card from the tow truck operator or write down the dr
201. er Ifthe system does not recognize the number it confirms the numbers followed by a tone If the number is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Dialing and dials the number If the number is not correct say No The system will ask for the number to be re entered Using the Digit Dial Command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Digit Dial The system responds with Digit dial using lt phone name gt please say the first digit to dial followed by a tone 3 Say the digit to be dialed one at a time Following each digit the system will repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone 4 Continue entering digits until the number to be dialed is complete After the whole number has been entered say Dial The system responds with OK Dialing and dials the number If an unwanted number is recognized by the system say Clear at any time to clear the last number To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system say Verify at any time and the system will repeat them 3 103 Using the Call Command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Call The system responds with Call using lt phone name gt Please say the name tag followed by a tone 3 Say the name tag of the person to call e If the system cle
202. er have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your vehicle Warranty booklet for details For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer A CAUTION Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous e Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing You could have an air out and a serious accident See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident could cause serious injury Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 58 Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the recommended pressure Worn old tires can cause accidents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them See High Speed Operation on page 5 60 for inflation pressure adjustment for high speed driving Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall The examples below show a typical passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall ES 4109 MS S K lt 2si60R 16 9 gt s pe DOT MaLgage oy af Z W es AT g A a NOGLE a P y oy or CA Avot syyn ow yy
203. er door lock switch The doors will not lock and the theft deterrent system will not arm until all the doors are closed and ten seconds have passed The delayed locking feature can be programmed through the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 57 See also Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 Programmable Automatic Door Locks Your vehicle has an automatic lock unlock feature which enables you to program the power door locks through the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 57 for more information on DIC programming Rear Door Security Locks Your vehicle has rear door security locks that prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside The rear door security locks are located on the inside edge of each rear door You must open the rear doors to access them To set the security locks do the following 1 Insert the key into the lock above the rear door security lock label and turn it to the horizontal position 2 Close the door 3 Repeat the steps for the other rear door To open a rear door while the security lock is on do the following 1 Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry transmitter the front door power lock switch or the rear door manual lock 2 Open the door from the outside To cancel the rear door security lock do the following 1 Unlock the door and open it from the outside
204. ergency use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 76 11 Remove the flat tire 12 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel 5 82 13 Place the compact spare tire on the wheel mounting surface A CAUTION Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose The vehicle s wheel could fall off causing a crash 14 Reinstall the wheel nuts Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub 15 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 5 83 A CAUTION Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after replacing Follow the torque specification supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts See Capacities and Specifications on page 5 103 for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications Notice Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification See Capacities and Specifications on page 5 103 for the wheel nut torque specification 5
205. erhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Notice It is important to check the engine oil regularly and keep it at the proper level Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle warranty Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary See Engine Oil on page 5 15 Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary See Engine Coolant on page 5 23 Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if necessary At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Inspect the vehicle s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures Do not forget to check the spare tire See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 58 Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 76 Tire Wear Inspection Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification Check the tires for wear and if necessary rotate the tires See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 66 At Least Once a Year Starter Switch Check A CAUTION When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before starting this check be sure
206. ers 4 Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1 52 5 If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit turn the vehicle off Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion if adjustable to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped a ees under the vehicle head restraint If this happens If a person of adult size is sitting in the right front adjust the head restraint See Head Restraints passenger seat but the off indicator is lit it could be on page 1 7 because that person is not sitting properly in the seat 6 Restart the vehicle If the on indicator is still lit secure the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer retailer 1 66 If this happens use the following steps to allow the system to detect that person and enable the right front passenger frontal airbag 1 Turn the vehicle off 2 Remove any additional material from the seat such as blankets cushions seat covers seat heaters or seat massagers 3 Place the seatback in the fully upright position 4 Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with legs comfortably exte
207. ers L 100 km This number is calculated based on the number of mpg L 100 km recorded since the last time this menu item was reset To reset this display press and hold the set reset button The display will return to zero 3 43 RANGE Press the trip fuel button until RANGE displays This display shows the approximate number of remaining miles mi or kilometers km the vehicle can be driven without refueling The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle s fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank This estimate will change if driving conditions change For example if driving in traffic and making frequent stops this display may read one number but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway the number may change even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank This is because different driving conditions produce different fuel economies Generally freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city driving If your vehicle is low on fuel the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will be displayed See FUEL LEVEL LOW under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 for more information Blank Display This display shows no information 3 44 Vehicle Information Menu Items Ti Vehicle Information Press this button to scroll through the following displays OIL LIFE Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays This display sh
208. es XL Explicit Language Channels These channels or any others can be blocked at a customer s request by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 XM Updating The encryption code in the receiver is being updated and no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seconds No XM Signal The system is functioning correctly but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal When the vehicle is moved into an open area the signal should return Loading XM The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly Channel Off Air This channel is not currently in service Tune in to another channel Channel Unauth This channel is blocked or cannot be received with your XM Subscription package Channel Unavail This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned Tune to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button No Artist Info No artist information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly 3 96 No Title Info No song title information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No CAT Info No category information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No Information No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel The system is w
209. es they will require inflation pressure adjustment when driving your vehicle at speeds of 100 mph 160 km h or higher Set the cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure shown on the tire sidewall or 35 psi 241 kPa whichever is lower See the example following When you end this high speed driving return the tires to the cold tire inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 and Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 58 Example You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure molded on the tire s sidewall in small letters near the rim flange It will read something like this Maximum load 690 kg 1521 Ibs 300 kPa 44 psi Max Press For this example you would set the inflation pressure for high speed driving at 35 psi 241 kPa Tire Pressure Monitor System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you
210. etect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 62 for additional information 5 61 Federal Communications Commission FCC and Industry and Science Canada The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and comply with RSS 210 of Industry and Science Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment 5 62 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation This v
211. eted or not completed successfully after rotating the vehicle s tires The DIC message and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS sensor matching process is performed successfully See TPMS Sensor Matching Process later in this section 5 63 One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged The DIC message and the TPMS malfunction light should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully See your dealer retailer for service Replacement tires or wheels do not match your vehicle s original equipment tires or wheels Tires and wheels other than those recommended for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly See Buying New Tires on page 5 68 e Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a low tire condition See your dealer retailer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on and stays on 5 64 TPMS Sensor Matching Process Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code Any time you rotate your vehicle s tires or replace one or more of the TPMS sensors the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire wheel position The sensors are matched to the tire wheel positions in the following order driver side front tire passenger s
212. etting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 62 REMOTE START If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to turn the remote start off or on The remote start feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using the RKE transmitter See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 7 for more information Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE START appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings OFF The remote start feature will be disabled ON default The remote start feature will be enabled NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC FACTORY SETTNGS Settings This feature allows you to set all of the personalization features back to their factory default settings Press the vehicle information button until FACTORY SETTNGS Settings appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings RESTORE ALL default The personalization features will be set to their factory default settings DO NOT RESTORE The personalization features will not be set to their factory def
213. ever it reduces vehicle speed without using the brakes for slight downgrades where the vehicle would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade If constant upshifting or downshifting occurs while driving up steep hills this position can be used to prevent repetitive types of shifts You might choose Intermediate instead of D Drive when driving on hilly winding roads and when towing a trailer so that there is less shifting between gears L Low This position reduces vehicle speed more than Intermediate without actually using the brakes You can use it on very steep hills or in deep snow or mud If the shift lever is placed in L Low the transmission will not shift into L Low until the vehicle is going slowly enough 2 26 Notice Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place Transmission Overheating If the transmission fluid temperature rises above 284 F 140 C or rises rapidly the Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light will flash See Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3 32 for more information When the transmission overheats it will go into a protection mode and will default shift into fifth gear if in the D Drive position or second gear i
214. ever exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle Z CAUTION Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on the vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle Notice Overloading your vehicle may cause damage Repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not overload your vehicle If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they will keep going A CAUTION Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to Towing Towing Your Vehicle To avoid damage the disabled vehicle should be towed with all four wheels off the ground Consult your dealer retai
215. eypad provides the capability of direct chapter or track number selection lt j Clear Press this button within three seconds after inputting a numeric selection to clear all numeric inputs 10 Double Digit Entries Press this button to select chapter or track numbers greater than 9 Press this button before inputting the number If the remote control becomes lost or damaged a new universal remote control can be purchased If this happens make sure the universal remote control uses a code set of Toshiba Battery Replacement To change the remote control batteries do the following 1 Slide the rear cover back on the remote control 2 Replace the two batteries in the compartment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Replace the battery cover If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place Recommended Action The picture does not fill the screen There are black borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it looks stretched out In auxiliary mode the picture moves or scrolls The remote control does not work After stopping the player I push Play but sometimes the DVD starts where left off and sometimes at the beginning The ignition might not be turned ON RUN or in ACC ACCESSORY Check the display mode settings in the setup menu b
216. f in the L Low position Continue driving the vehicle in either position depending on the required vehicle speed and load Once the fluid temperature lowers to the normal temperature range the transmission will return to the normal shift patterns Towing or driving on long hills can cause the transmission fluid temperature to be higher than normal If the transmission fluid temperature will not cool you may need to pull over and check the transmission fluid level You should also check the engine coolant temperature If it is hot see Engine Overheating on page 5 28 Automatic Transmission Operation 3 6L V6 with 6 Speed The shift lever for the automatic transmission is located on the console between the seats Maximum engine speed is limited when the vehicle is in P Park or N Neutral to protect driveline components from improper operation There are several different positions for the shift lever When using the MSM Manual Shift Mode a number indicating the gear selected will appear on the instrument cluster below the shift position display For more information on the manual shift option see Manual Shift Mode in this section P Park This position locks the front wheels It is the best position to use when the engine is started because the vehicle cannot move easily A CAUTION It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle
217. face of the wheel s The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome plated wheels The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of the vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes abrasive cleaners 5 94 cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because they could damage the surface Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels Notice Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only Use chrome polish only on chrome plated wheels but avoid any painted surface of the wheel and buff off immediately after application Notice Driving the vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes could damage the aluminum or chrome plated wheels The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Never drive a vehicle that has aluminum or chrome plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes Tires To clean the tires use a stiff brush with tire cleaner Notice Using petroleum based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires s
218. for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle Notice Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this section and see your dealer retailer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle 4 34 The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling acceleration braking durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering takes correct equipment and it has to be used properly The following information has many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers So please read this section carefully before pulling a trailer Load pulling components such as the engine transmission wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads generating extra heat The trailer also adds considerably to wind resistance increasing the pulling requirements Pulling A Trailer Here are some import
219. fore driving 2 32 Shifting Into Park A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you are pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 34 1 Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 2 31 for more information 2 Move the shift lever into P Park by pressing the button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle 3 Turn the ignition key to LOCK OFF 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave the vehicle with the key the vehicle is in P Park Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine Running A CAUTION It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running The vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running be sure the vehicle is in P Park and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it Afte
220. from its storage clip on the back of the seatback 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top 2 Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide 1 28 A CAUTION A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described previously in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guide squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide Slide the guide back onto its storage clip located on the seatback 1 29 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy 1 30 The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash For
221. fuel system deposits from forming allowing the emission control system to work properly In most cases you should not have to add anything to the fuel However some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean or if the vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly one bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS added to the fuel tank at every engine oil change can help clean deposits from fuel injectors and intake valves GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended by General Motors Also your dealer retailer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit related problems Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area We recommend that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier However E85 85 ethanol and other fuels containing more than 10 ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels Notice This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber
222. g except when applying the brake pedal firmly A CAUTION The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well That could lead to an accident When the brake wear warning sound is heard have the vehicle serviced Notice Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes 5 34 Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page 5 103 Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer retailer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign that brake service might be required Brake Adjustment Every time the brakes are applied with or without the vehicle moving the brakes adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking The vehicle was designed and tested with top quality brake parts When parts of the braking system are replace
223. g on the hips touching the thighs If yes continue If no return to the booster seat Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip If yes continue If no return to the Older children who have outgrown booster seats should booster seat wear the vehicle s safety belts If you have the choice a child should sit in a position with a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide 1 31 Q What is the proper way to wear safety belts A An older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the top of the thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 25 According to accident statistics children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly 1 32 A CAUTION Never do this Never allow two children to wear the same
224. g to the radio unplug the cellular phone and turn it off Multi Band Antenna The multi band antenna is located on the roof of the vehicle The antenna is used for the AM FM radio OnStar and the XM Satellite Radio Service System if the vehicle has these features Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for clear reception If the vehicle has a sunroof the performance of the AM FM radio OnStar and the XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open 3 119 4 NOTES 3 120 Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle Your Driving the Road and the Vehicle 4 2 Driving at NigNU iiteccteveatetrameiwesecaneciaosnebes 4 14 Driving for Better Fuel Economy 000 4 2 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4 14 Defensive Driving ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 0 eeee 4 15 Drunk Driving scsetisdatacansnateterat aatviaatacatardeenacead 4 3 Highway HypnoSis ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ege 4 16 Control of a Vehicle ccccceeeeseeeeeaeeeeeneees 4 4 Hill and Mountain Roads ceeeeeeeeee eens 4 16 Braking ernennen anp a Eee a 4 4 Winter DIVINO era ac mencsenangiee canes aen 4 17 Antilock Brake System ABS 4 5 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Braking in Emergencies sceeeeeeeeeenee eee ees 4 5 IGG OF SNOW aotreot aian a Ei 4 20 StabiliTrak System ora erkender rene 4 6 Rocking Your Vehicle to
225. gear A higher gear and light application of the gas pedal may allow you to gain more traction on slippery surfaces With the MSM Manual Shift Mode the vehicle can accelerate from a stop in 2 Second or 3 Third 1 Move the shift lever from D Drive into the manual gate 2 With the vehicle stopped move the shift lever forward to select 2 Second or 3 Third The vehicle will start from a stop position in 2 Second or 3 Third 3 Once the vehicle is moving select the desired drive gear or move the shift lever to the D Drive position Parking Brake The parking brake lever is located to the right of the driver seat 2 31 To set the parking brake hold the brake pedal down and pull up on the parking brake lever If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on To release the parking brake hold the brake pedal down Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press the release button Hold the release button in as you move the brake lever all the way down Make sure to release the parking brake before driving the vehicle If the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at least 4 mph 6 km h a chime will activate to remind you to release the parking brake Notice Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off be
226. ght not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped have the vehicle towed for service Antilock Brake System ABS Warning Light For vehicles with the Antilock Brake System ABS this light comes on briefly when the engine is started If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off If the ABS light stays on turn the ignition off If the light comes on while driving stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition off Then start the engine again to reset the system If the ABS light stays on or comes on again while driving the vehicle needs service If the regular brake system warning light is not on the vehicle still has brakes but not antilock brakes If the regular brake system warning light is also on the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 30 For vehicles with a Driver Information Center DIC see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 for all brake related DIC messages 3 31 Traction Control System TCS Warning Light A ee Your vehicle has a Traction Control System TCS and StabiliTrak warning light When the traction contro
227. gine Oil Light If this light comes on and stays on for 30 seconds it means that service is required for your vehicle A CHANGE OIL SOON message will appear on the DIC For more information see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 After having the oil changed you will need to reset the light See Engine Oil on page 5 15 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information Security Light Fog Lamp Light 0 For information regarding this light and the vehicle s security system see Content Theft Deterrent on page 2 17 and PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation on page 2 18 The fog lamp light comes on when the fog lamps are in use The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off See Fog Lamps on page 3 15 for more information 3 37 Cruise Control Light The cruise control light comes on whenever the d cruise control is set The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off See Cruise Control on page 3 10 for more information Reduced Engine Power Light Your vehicle has a reduced engine power light This light along with the service vehicle soon light will be displayed when a noticeable reduction in the vehicle s performance may occur Stop the vehicle and turn off the ignition Wait for 10 seconds and restart your vehicle This may correct the condition See Service Vehicle Soon Light on page 3 40 for more information The vehicle may be driven at a reduce
228. gine does not start and the key is held in START cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage To prevent gear damage this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC ACCESSORY or LOCK OFF position Notice The engine is designed to work with the electronics in the vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer retailer If you do not the engine might not perform properly Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Notice Cranking the engine for long periods of time by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking has ended can overheat and damage the cranking motor and drain the battery Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to let the cranking motor cool down 2 22 Engine Coolant Heater The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up in cold weather conditions at or below 0 F 18 C Vehicles with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at least four hours before starting An internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord may exist which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above OF 18 C To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open
229. gine starts the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the engine is running 3 To extend the engine run time by 10 minutes repeat Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is still running The engine run time can only be extended if it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven Remote start can be extended one time If the remote start procedure is used again before the first 10 minute time frame has ended the first 10 minutes will immediately expire and the second 10 minute time frame will start For example if the lock button and then the remote start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle has been running for five minutes 10 minutes are added allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes After entering the vehicle during a remote start insert and turn the key to ON RUN to drive the vehicle After a remote start the engine will automatically shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done or the vehicle s key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to ON RUN A maximum of two remote starts or remote start attempts are allowed between ignition cycles After your vehicle s engine has been started two times using the remote start button the vehicle s ignition switch must be turned to ON RUN and then back to LOCK OFF using the key before the remote start procedure can be used again To manually shut off the engine after a remote start do any of the following Aim t
230. h all four wheels on the ground or even with only two of its wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain components Do not tow an all wheel drive vehicle with any of its wheels on the ground The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all of its wheels on the ground If the vehicle is front wheel drive it can be towed with two of its wheels on the ground See Dolly Towing following If the vehicle is all wheel drive it cannot be towed with any of its wheels on the ground It must be towed with a platform truck or trailer 4 28 Dinghy Towing Vehicles with a 6 speed Transmission If the vehicle is front wheel drive it can be dinghy towed from the front These vehicles may also be towed by putting the front wheels on a dolly See Dolly Towing later in this section If the vehicle is all wheel drive it can be dinghy towed from the front These vehicles can also be towed by placing them on a platform trailer with all four wheels off of the ground These vehicles cannot be towed using a dolly For vehicles being dinghy towed re install the fuse and run the vehicle at the beginning of each day and at each RV fuel stop for about five minutes This will ensure proper lubrication of transmission components To tow a vehicle with a 6 speed transmission from the front with all four wheels on the ground 1 Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow vehicle and shift the transmission to P Park
231. he vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park See Shifting Into There are several different positions for the automatic Park on page 2 32 If you are pulling a trailer see transmission Towing a Trailer on page 4 34 P Park This position locks the front wheels It is i i the best position to use when you start the engine Make sure the shift lever is fully in P Park before because the vehicle cannot move easily starting the engine The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system You must fully apply the brake pedal and then press the shift lever button before you can shift from P Park when the ignition key is in ON RUN 2 24 If you cannot shift out of P Park ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into P Park as you maintain brake application Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another gear See Shifting Out of Park on page 2 33 R Reverse Use this gear to back up Notice Shifting to R Reverse while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Shift to R Reverse only after the vehicle is stopped To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging the transmission see f Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow on page 4 2
232. he Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice or use the power door lock switch To lock the liftgate press the lock button on the RKE transmitter or use the power door lock switch The liftgate does not have a key lock cylinder To open the liftgate press the touchpad centered on the underside of the liftgate handle and pull up When closing the liftgate use the molded handles to pull the liftgate down Push the liftgate closed until it latches Liftgate Operation with Loss of Power The liftgate is equipped with an electric latch If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage the liftgate will not open To open the liftgate if this happens remove the interior trim plug located at the base of the liftgate from inside the vehicle Use a tool to push the service release lever SS located on the latch until you hear or feel the gate release The liftgate can now be opened and closed manually You will need to use this procedure to open the liftgate until the power is restored Windows A CAUTION Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a hy vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous om They can be overcome by the extreme heat and it MU pet alone in a vehicle especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather Dani IN ay suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat Wee stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a P oy Y La LEX Power Windows A CAUT
233. he All Wheel Drive Disabled Light comes on along with the ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF message when the rear drive system is overheating This light will turn off when the rear drive system cools down If this light stays on it must be reset To reset the light turn the ignition off and then back on again If the light stays on see your dealer retailer for service See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 for more information Steering Electric Power Steering 3 4L V6 Engine If the engine stalls while driving the power steering assist system will continue to operate until you are able to stop the vehicle If power steering assist is lost because the electric power steering system is not functioning the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several times until it stops or hold the steering wheel in the stopped position for an extended amount of time you may notice a reduced amount of power steering assist The normal amount of power steering assist should return shortly after a few normal steering movements The electric power steering system does not require regular maintenance If you suspect steering system problems such as abnormally high steering effort for a prolonged period of time contact your dealer retailer for service repairs Hydraulic Power Steering 3 6L V6 Engine If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops or the power steering
234. he FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites each having six favorite stations available per page Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM FM or XM if equipped stations To store a station as a favorite perform the following steps 1 Tune to the desired radio station 2 Press the FAV button to display the page where the station is to be stored 3 Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a beep sounds When that pushbutton is pressed and released the station that was set returns 4 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station to be stored as a favorite 3 70 The number of favorites pages can be setup using the MENU button To setup the number of favorites pages perform the following steps 1 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1 6 tab 3 Select the desired number of favorites pages by pressing the pushbutton located below the displayed page numbers 4 Press the FAV button or let the menu time out to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency tabs and to begin the process of programming favorites for the chosen amount of numbered pages Setting the Tone Bass Treble Base Radio with CD EQ Equalization To adjust the bass or treble press the Jd knob or EQ button until the desired tone control tab displays Turn the s knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increas
235. he RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press the remote start button until the parking lamps turn off Turn on the hazard warning flashers Insert the vehicle s key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to ON RUN and then back to LOCK OFF The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if any of the following occur The vehicle s key is in the ignition The vehicle s hood liftgate or doors are not closed The hazard warning flashers are on There is an emission control system malfunction The engine coolant temperature is too high The oil pressure is low e Two remote vehicle starts have already been used The maximum number of remote starts or remote start attempts between ignition cycles with the key is two The remote start feature may be disabled The system may be enabled or disabled through the DIC See REMOTE START under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 57 for additional information Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle start system enabled Remote Start Ready If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start feature it may have the remote start ready feature This feature allows your dealer retailer to add the manufacturer s remote vehicle start feature If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature your RKE transmitter will have extended range that will allow you to lock or unlock your
236. he inactive CD remains inside the radio for future listening CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press to play a CD when listening to the radio The CD icon and a message showing disc and or track number displays when a CD is in the player Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Input Device Found displays Using an MP3 Radio with CD and DVD Player MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW Disc Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs The radio also plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio CDA files and MP3 WMA files depending on which slot the disc is loaded into By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio CDA and ignores the MP3 WMA files on the DVD deck On the CD deck pressing the CAT category button toggles between compressed and uncompressed audio format the default being the uncompressed format CDA MP3 WMA Format If you burn an MP3 WMA disc on a personal computer Make sure the MP3 WMA files are recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc Do not mix standard audio and MP3 WMA files on one disc The CD player lower slot is able to read and play a maximum combination of 512 files and folders The DVD player upper slot is able to read 255 folders 15 playlists and 40 sessions Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Organize songs by albums using one
237. he vehicle s interior only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on 5 88 surfaces for which they were not intended Use glass cleaner only on glass Remove any accidental over spray from other surfaces immediately To prevent over spray apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth Notice Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on the vehicle could scratch the glass and or cause damage to the rear window defogger When cleaning the glass on the vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in the vehicle s breathing space Before using cleaners read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label While cleaning the vehicle s interior maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle s doors and windows Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles Products that remove odors from the vehicle s upholstery and clean the vehicle s glass can be obtained from your dealer retailer Do not clean the vehicle using A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface A stiff brush It can cause damage to the vehicle s interior surfaces Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a cleaning cloth Use of heavy pressure can damage the interior and does not improve the effectiveness of s
238. heet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer retailer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer s retailer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer retailer or an underbody car washing system can do this Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring
239. hen there are disc load or eject problems Disc Format Error This message displays if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up or if the disc is damaged Disc Region Error This message displays if the disc is not from a correct region No Disc Inserted This message displays if no disc is present when the A button is pressed on the radio DVD Distortion Video distortion may occur when operating cellular phones scanners CB radios Global Position Systems GPS two way radios mobile fax or walkie talkies It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle Excludes the OnStar System Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water Cleaning the Video Screen When cleaning the video screen use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen as damage can result Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN The radio does not operate if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle Audio Steering Wheel Controls Vehicles with audio steering wheel controls could differ depending on the vehicle s options Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel A Next Press to
240. her anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash Your child restraint may have a single tether A or a dual tether C Either will have a single attachment B to secure the top tether to the anchor 1 43 Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached Others require the top tether always to be attached In Canada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint If the child restraint does not have a top tether one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available 1 44 Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations li Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors 9 Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors Rear Seat Each rear seating position has exposed metal anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion The top tether anchors for each rear seating position are located on the back of the rear seatback You may need to adjust the rear compartment storage panel cover in the rear cargo area to access the anchors Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position
241. hich could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying General Motors If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer retailer or General Motors To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue S E Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from safercar gov 7 16 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect notify Transport Canada immediately in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited Call them at 1 800 333 0510 or write to Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA or Transport Canada in a situation like this please notify General Motors Call 1 800 222 1020 or write Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P O Box 33170 Detroit MI 48232 5170 In Canada call 1
242. hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash A rear facing infant seat A provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints The harness system holds the infant in place and ina crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint 1 37 A forward facing child seat B provides restraint for the child s body with the harness A booster seat C D is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window 1 38 Securing an Add On Child Restraint in the Vehicle A CAUTION A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle s safety belt or LATCH system following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual To help reduce the chance of injury the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap shoul
243. his program STEP THREE Canadian Owners In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2 General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no charge Mediation Arbitration Program General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory related vehicle service claims The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process from the time you file your complaint to the final decision should be completed in about 70 days We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal quick and free of charge For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP call toll free 1 800 207 0685 or call the General Motors Customer Communication Centre 1 800 263 3777 English 1 800 263 7854 French or write to The Mediation Arbitration Program c o Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Limited Mail Code CA1 163 005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa Ontario L1H 8P7 Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Online Owner Center Online Owner Center U S www gmo
244. hosen as the default display The new track name displays File System and Naming The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name without the extension such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename does not display Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however they cannot be edited using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files Playing an MP3 In Either the DVD or CD Slot Insert a CD R or CD RW partway into either the top or bottom slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD R or CD RW should begin playing Depending on the format of the disc a softkey menu appears and allow navigation of the disc The menu reads left to right as RDM Randomize song play order a Folder icon with left and right arrows to move up or down through available folders a PL tag if the disc has a Playlist available and a Music Navigator tag If a Playlist tag is shown toggling this key brings up a Folder softkey only or the menu as previously described If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD R or CD RW in the player it
245. i 3 33 TIES seieren repa eara E ence rn EEE naked lle 5 51 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels Cleaning esena ERE ED Ey Es 5 94 Buying New Tires eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeee 5 68 Chains aan an on ble Ehe FEEL bie EEG 5 74 Changing a Flat Tire 55 450 ar bun teeter sns 5 76 Cleaning arrene erkende 5 94 Compact Spare cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 87 Different SiZ 2 2 2 0 cece aee a RESES 5 70 High Speed Operation cceeeeeeeeeee eee ees 5 60 If a Tire Goes Flat cceceeceeeeeeeeeeenee een ees 5 75 Inflation Tire Pressure sceeeeeeeeeee eens 5 58 Inspection and Rotation ceeeeeeee eee eee es 5 66 Installing the Spare Tire ceeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 5 79 Pressure Monitor Operation eeeeeee eee 5 62 Pressure Monitor System eeeeeeeee eee ees 5 61 Removing the Flat Tire a nn 5 79 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools 5 77 Sidewall Labeling c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 52 Tires cont Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools 5 85 Terminology and Definitions eee 5 55 Uniform Tire Quality Grading eeeeeeeee 5 71 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 5 72 Wheel Replacement 2 ceeeeceeeeeeeeeees 5 72 When It Is Time for New Tires 00085 5 67 Towing Recreational Vehicle ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 27 Towing a Trailer 222 sv
246. ical to the vehicle unless you check with your dealer retailer first Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should Add on equipment can drain the vehicle battery even if the vehicle is not operating The vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle see Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 68 Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem have it fixed Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by fuses and circuit breakers This greatly reduces the chance of circuit overload and fire caused by electrical problems The vehicle has an underhood fuse block and an instrument panel fuse block To identify and check fuses circuit breakers and relays refer to the Fuse Usage Chart on the inside surface of the fuse panel door Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block is located on the passenger side of the center console to the left of the glove box near the floor N Remove the console cover to access the fuse block 5 97 RAP RLY
247. icant Aerosol GM Part No U S 12346293 in Canada 992723 or lubricant Spring Anchor meeting requirements of NLGI 2 and Category LB or GC LB Release Pawl Hood and Door Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Hinges Rear GM Part No U S 12346241 Folding Seat in Canada 10953474 Weatherstrip Lubricant GM Part No U S 3634770 in Canada 10953518 or Dielectric Silicone Grease GM Part No U S 12345579 in Canada 992887 Weatherstrip Conditioning Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer retailer Part Yai Part Number ACDelco Part Number Front Driver Sae aam o0 O ew OO o Front Passenger Sde Ton e75 207 Rear 15 2 in 38 6 cm 1920327 y O Engine Drive Belt Routing 3 4L V6 Engine 6 16 3 6L V6 Engine Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading who performed the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided See Maintenance Requirements on page 6 2 Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6 10 can be added on the following record pages You should retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance Record Maintenance Record cont d Odometer i Maintenance I or i Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Maintenance Record cont d Odometer i Maintenance I o
248. ice an increase in seat surface temperature until the seat is occupied for a short period of time Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters For example some laws may require a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles If your vehicle is low on fuel do not use the remote start feature The vehicle may run out of fuel If your vehicle has the remote start feature the RKE transmitter functions will have an increased range of operation However the range may be less while the vehicle is running There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter see Remote Keyless Entry RKE System on page 2 4 for additional information Q Remote Vehicle Start This button will be on the RKE transmitter if you have remote start To start the engine using the remote start feature 1 Aim the RKE transmitter that has a remote vehicle start button at the vehicle 2 Press and release the transmitter s lock button then immediately press and hold the remote vehicle start button Hold the remote start button until the vehicle s turn signal lamps flash or for at least four seconds if the vehicle s lights are not visible The vehicle s doors will be locked Pressing the remote start button again after the vehicle has started will turn off the ignition When the vehicle s en
249. icle warranty Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes Check with your dealer retailer before adding electrical equipment When adding electrical equipment be sure to follow the installation instructions included with the equipment 3 18 Notice Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the warranty Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only Ashtray s and Cigarette Lighter For vehicles with a removable ashtray and cigarette lighter the ashtray can be placed into the front console cupholders To use the lighter push it in all the way and let go When it is ready it pops back out by itself Notice Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating will not allow the lighter to back away from the heating element when it is hot Damage from overheating may occur to the lighter or heating element or a fuse could be blown Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 15 amperes Notice If papers pins or other flammable items are put in the ashtray hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage the vehicle Never put flammable items in the ashtray Climate Controls Climate Control System The heating cooling and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with thi
250. ico S de R L de C V Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma 2740 Col Lomas de Bezares C P 11910 Mexico D F 01 800 508 0000 Long Distance 011 52 53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program E MOBILITY This program available to qualified applicants can reimburse you up to 1 000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle such as hand controls or a wheelchair scooter lift The offer is available for a very limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase lease For more details or to determine your vehicle s eligibility visit gmmobility com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1 800 323 9935 Text telephone TTY users call 1 800 833 9935 General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program Call 1 800 GM DRIVE 463 7483 for details TTY users call 1 800 263 3830 Roadside Assistance Program For U S purchased vehicles call 1 800 CHEV USA 1 800 243 8872 Text telephone TTY 1 888 889 2438 For Canadian purchased vehicles call 1 800 268 6800 Service is available 24 hours a day 365 days a year Calling for Assistance When calling Roadside Assistance have the following information ready Your name home address and home telephone number Telephone number of your location Location of the vehicle Model year color and license plate number of the vehicle e Odometer reading Vehicle Identification Number VIN
251. ide front tire passenger side rear tire and driver side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool See your dealer retailer for service The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure If increasing the tire s air pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the tire s sidewall To decrease air pressure out of a tire you can use the pointed end of the valve cap a pencil style air pressure gage or a key You have two minutes to match the first tire wheel position and five minutes overall to match all four tire wheel positions If it takes longer than two minutes to match the first tire and wheel or more than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching process stops and you need to start over The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below 1 2 Set the parking brake Turn the ignition switch to ON RUN with the engine off Press the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter s lock and unlock buttons at the same time for approximately five seconds The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen Start with the driver side front tire Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure for five seconds or until a horn chirp sounds The horn chi
252. ifferent crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object e If the vehicle hits an object that deforms the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object does not deform 1 60 e If the vehicle hits a narrow object like a pole the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object like a wall e If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts In addition your vehicle has dual stage frontal airbags Dual stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity Your vehicle has electronic frontal sensors which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact For moderate frontal impacts dual stage airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment For more severe frontal impacts full deployment occurs Your vehicle may or may not have roof rail airbags See Airbag System on page 1 55 Roof rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes In addition these roof rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover Roof rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s desig
253. inc com Or you can write to Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation Allow ample time for delivery Note to Canadian Customers All listed prices are quoted in U S funds Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U S funds Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers that record information about the vehicle s performance and how it is driven For example your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags ina crash and if so equipped to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle These modules may store data to help your dealer retailer technician service your vehicle Some modules may also store data about how you operate the vehicle such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed These modules may also retain the owner s personal preferences such as radio pre sets seat positions and temperature settings Event Data Recorders This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehic
254. information button to scroll through the following settings LIGHTS OFF The exterior lamps will not flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter LIGHTS ON default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 60 DELAY LOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not the locking of the vehicle s doors and liftgate will be delayed When locking the doors and liftgate with the power door lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open this feature will delay locking the doors and liftgate until five seconds after the last door is closed You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use The key must be out of the ignition for this feature to work You can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice See Delayed Locking on page 2 10 for more information Press the vehicle information button until DELAY LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings LOCK DELAY OFF There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle s doors LOCK D
255. ion of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 1 61 The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle 1 62 A CAUTION When an airbag inflates there may be dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment you should seek medical attention The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors turn the interior lamps on and turn the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate You can lock the doors turn the interior lamps off and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for those features In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag windshields are broken by vehicle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag Airbags are designed to inflate only on
256. ion so they can provide services where it is located OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area OnStar service also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that area has coverage network capacity and reception when the service is needed and technology that is compatible with the OnStar service Not all services are available everywhere particularly in remote or enclosed areas or at all times 2 44 Location information about the vehicle is only available if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and available The vehicle must have a working electrical system including adequate battery power for the OnStar equipment to operate There are other problems OnStar cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing OnStar service at any particular time or place Some examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle in a crash hills tall buildings tunnels weather or wireless phone network congestion Your Responsibility Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor cannot be heard If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red the system may not be functioning properly Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic If the light appears clear no light is appearing your OnStar subscription has expired and all services have been
257. iver s name the service s name and the phone number Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is towed away Make sure this includes your insurance information and registration if you keep these items in your vehicle Gather the important information you will need from the other driver Things like name address phone number driver s license number vehicle license plate vehicle make model and model year Vehicle Identification Number VIN insurance company and policy number and a general description of the damage to the other vehicle If possible call your insurance company from the scene of the crash They will walk you through the information they will need If they ask for a police report phone or go to the police department headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee In some states provinces with no fault insurance laws a report may not be necessary This is especially true if there are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your vehicle Whether you select a dealer retailer or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage make sure you are comfortable with them Remember you will have to feel comfortable with their work for a long time Once you have an estimate read it carefully and make sure you understand what work will be performed on your vehicle If you have a question ask for an explanati
258. ize songs by albums using one folder for each album Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less Avoid subfolders The system can support up to 8 subfolders deep however keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback Make sure playlists have a mp3 or wpl extension other file extensions might not work e Minimize the length of the file folder or playlist names Long file folder or playlist names ora combination of a large number of files and folders or playlists can cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files folders playlists or sessions To play a larger number of files folders playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file folder or playlist name Long names also take up more space on the display and might not fully display e Finalize the audio disc before burning it Trying to add music to an existing disc can cause the disc not to function in the player Playlists can be changed by using lt previous and gt next folder buttons the Jd knob or the SEEK arrows An MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW that was recorded using no file folders can also be played If a CD R CD RW contains more than the maximum of 50 folders 50 playlists and 255 files the player will access and navigate up to the maximum but all items over the maximum are not accessible
259. jumper cables from both vehicles do the following 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle 5 Return the fuse block cover to its original position All Wheel Drive If you have an all wheel drive vehicle be sure to perform the lubricant checks described in this section However there are two additional systems that need lubrication Transfer Case Power Transfer Unit When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 How to Check Lubricant PTU for 3 4L V6 Model PTU for 3 6L V6 Model A Fill Plug B Drain Plug To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be ona level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add some lubricant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole located on the transfer case 5 42 What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Carrier Assembly Differential Rear Drive Module When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maint
260. k When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes Put someone on it Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it is just a seat on wheels Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider does not stop The person keeps going until stopped by something In a real vehicle it could be the windshield or the instrument panel or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your strongest bones take the forces That is why safety belts make such good sense Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q A Will be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted And you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you are upside down If my vehicle has airbags why should I have to wear safety belts Airbags are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Whether or not an airbag is provided all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection That is true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions Q If am a good driver and I never drive far from A home why should wear safety belts You may be an e
261. k de 1 7 Headlamp AAIMUING saorane anana T ai 5 43 Headlamps c dcccausecstciogecntssancaentansassrentndelaeaen 3 13 Bulb Replacement eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 44 Daytime Running Lamps DRL 05 3 14 Flasht0 Pass siaisnensiie Mickie at eee 3 8 Headlamps Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking Lamps eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee 5 44 High Low Beam Changer ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 8 On Reminder cccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeee 3 13 Range Adjustment ccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 1 7 Heated Seats cccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 1 4 Heata sicnccciddtacacinsdecasansesseanendencamebeetennetnetieanss 3 19 Engine Coolant Serisine naani ea TRA 2 23 Height Adjuster Driver Seat d dsseeeerererree 1 3 Highbeam On Light ccseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 38 High Speed Operation Tires c eseeeeeeee eee 5 60 Highway Hypnosis 2 eceeetcet ene eee ences 4 16 Hill and Mountain Roads e 4 16 Hood Checking Things Under e eeeeeeeeeeee 5 10 Release soon meciria a ai 5 11 OM cacetasevsdevicakedartnsncatecnsemcneenahe can EE AEA 3 6 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 5 1 17 Ignition POSITIONS iiion a 2 20 Infants and Young Children Restraints 1 34 Inflation Tire Pressure eceeeeeeeee este eens 5 58 Instrument Panel Brightness s d ctsaencteatevaashrteadtatsncnttc
262. k knock If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking the engine needs service Gasoline Specifications At a minimum gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN CGSB 3 5 or 3 511 in Canada Some gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT See Additives on page 5 6 for additional information California Fuel If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications See the underhood emission control label If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards the vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications but emission control system performance might be affected The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog check test See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 34 If this occurs return to your authorized dealer retailer for diagnosis If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that help prevent engine and
263. key is removed from the ignition The system is automatically disarmed when the key is turned to ON RUN ACC ACCESSORY or START from the LOCK OFF position You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system The security light will come on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft deterrent system When the PASS Key Ill system senses that someone is using the wrong key it prevents the vehicle from starting Anyone using a trial and error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes If the engine does not start and the security light on the instrument panel comes on when trying to start the vehicle there may be a problem with your theft deterrent system Turn the ignition off and try again If the engine still does not start and the key appears to be undamaged try another ignition key At this time you may also want to check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 97 If the engine still does not start with the other key your vehicle needs service If your vehicle does start the first key may be faulty See your dealer retailer who can service the PASS Key Ill to have a new key made In an emergency contact Roadside Assistance It is possible for the PASS Key IIl decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key Up to nine additional keys may be programmed for the vehicle The following procedure is for program
264. l is activated the light will flash when the TCS is limiting wheel spin or when the StabiliTrak system is active You may feel or hear the system working but this is normal This light may also come on after extended heavy braking indicating the brakes have become too hot to limit wheel spin This light will come on and stay on if the TCS is turned off using the traction control on off button located next to the gear shift lever If the TCS warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on your vehicle needs service See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 7 and StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 for more information 3 32 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light The engine coolant temperature warning light will come on when the engine has overheated oo If this happens you should pull over and turn off the engine as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 5 28 for more information Notice Driving with the engine coolant temperature warning light on could cause the vehicle to overheat See Engine Overheating on page 5 28 The vehicle s engine could be damaged and it might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Never drive with the engine coolant temperature warning light on Engine Coolant Temperature Gage This gage measures the temperature of the vehicle s engine If the indicator needle moves into the shaded area the engine is too hot A te
265. l system is activated the StabiliTrak TCS warning light comes on the instrument panel cluster and TRACTION CONTROL ON briefly displays If the system is limiting wheel spin when the button is pressed the StabiliTrak TCS warning light comes on the instrument panel cluster The system will not turn off until there is no longer a current need to limit wheel spin Turn the system back on by pressing the button again If the light does not come on TCS might not be working and the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer retailer Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect the vehicle s performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 for more information All Wheel Drive AWD System If the vehicle has all wheel drive AWD the AWD system operates automatically without any action required by the driver If the front drive wheels begin to slip the rear wheels will automatically begin to drive the vehicle as required Torque is also applied to the rear wheels during launches There may be a slight engagement noise during hard use but this is normal The Service All Wheel Drive Light is located on the instrument panel cluster This light and the SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE message in the DIC will come on and stay on to indicate there may be a problem with the drive system and service is required See Service All Wheel Drive Light on page 3 39 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 for more information T
266. lant surge tank pressure cap off start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot Watch out for the engine cooling fans By this time the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower If the level is lower add more of the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the COLD FILL line 5 27 5 Then replace the pressure cap Be sure the pressure cap is hand tight 6 After driving the vehicle check the level in the surge tank again when the cooling system has cooled down If the coolant is not at the proper level repeat Steps 1 through 3 and reinstall the pressure cap If the coolant is not at the proper level when the system cools down again see your dealer retailer Notice If the pressure cap is not tightly installed coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured Engine Overheating The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine overheating You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle s instrument panel See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3 33 There are also several different types of engine overheating messages that may be displayed in the Driver Information Center DIC See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 5 28 You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning appears but instead get service help right away See Roadside As
267. ld be there not on the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you Q What is wrong with this The belt is over an armrest A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this The belt would be much too high In a crash you can slide under the belt The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen not on the pelvic bones and that could cause serious or fatal injuries Be sure the belt goes under the armrests 1 21 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which are not as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It should be worn over the shoulder at all times 1 22 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and
268. lder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary 1 53 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 1 54 6 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor When installing a forward facing child restraint it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 7 lf the vehicle does not have a rear seat and your child restraint has a top tether follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions regarding the use of the top tether See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH on page 1 42 for more information 8 Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure If the airbag is off the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit see If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint under Passenger Sensing System on page 1 63 for more information To remove the child restrain
269. le dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was pressing the accelerator and or brake pedal How fast the vehicle was traveling This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur Important EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location is recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR GM will not access this data or share it with others except with the consent of the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee in response to an official request of police or similar government office as part
270. le has a radio with a single CD or a CD and DVD player it has a button for setting the time and date To adjust the time and date 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press to display HR MIN MM DD YYYY hour minute month day and year 3 Press the pushbutton located under any one of the tabs to be changed 4 To increase the time or date do one of the following Press the pushbutton below the selected tab Press bl SEEK Press DD FWD e Turn dd clockwise 5 To decrease the time or date do one of the following e PressKI SEEK Press lt lt REV e Turn dd counter clockwise 3 65 To change the time default setting from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change the date default setting from month day year to day month year 1 Press and then the pushbutton located under the forward arrow tab that displays on the radio screen until the time 12H hour and 24H hour and the date MM DD month and day and DD MM day and month displays 2 Press the pushbutton located under the desired tab 3 Press again to apply the selected default or let the screen time out MP3 Radio with a Six Disc CD Player If the vehicle has a radio with a six disc CD player the radio has a MENU button to set the time and date To set the time and date 1 Turn the ignition key to ACC ACCESSORY or ON RUN then press D to turn the radio on 2 Press MENU 3 Press the pushbutton below the tab The HR MIN M
271. le instruments often Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain Tips for driving in these conditions include Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape Check all fluid levels and brakes tires cooling system and transmission e Going down steep or long hills shift to a lower gear A CAUTION If you do not shift down the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope A CAUTION Coasting downhill in N Neutral or with the ignition off is dangerous The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have the engine running and the vehicle in gear when going downhill e Stay in your own lane Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane Top of hills Be alert something could be in your lane stalled car accident Pay attention to special road signs falling rocks area winding roads long grades passing or no passing zones and take appropriate action Winter Driving Driving on Snow or Ice Drive carefully when there is snow or ice betw
272. ler or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome see Recreational Vehicle Towing following Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly Here are some important things to consider before Dinghy Towing Vehicles with a 5 speed Transmission recreational vehicle towing What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer s recommendations What is the distance that will be travelled Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow ls the proper towing equipment going to be used See your dealer retailer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations Is the vehicle ready to be towed Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4 15 Notice Towing an all wheel drive vehicle wit
273. letters and numbers define a tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description The letter T as the first character in the tire size means the tire is for temporary use only 5 54 G TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to GM s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall GM s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines Tire Size The following illustration shows an example of a typical passenger vehicle tire size P225 60R16 97S IT HIT A Passenger P Meiric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association B Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall C Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 60 as shown in item C of the illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it is wide D Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply co
274. ll use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place MSM Manual Shift Mode This position available on the models with the MSM Manual Shift Mode allows you to change gears similar to a manual transmission If the vehicle has this feature see MSM Manual Shift Mode MSM Manual Shift Mode To use this feature do the following 1 Move the shift lever from D Drive to the left into the manual gate While driving in manual shift mode the transmission will remain in the driver gear selected When coming to a stop in the manual position the vehicle will automatically shift to 1 First gear 2 Push the shift lever forward toward the plus to upshift or rearward toward the minus to downshift When using the MSM Manual Shift Mode the number of the gear selected will appear on the instrument cluster below the shift position display 2 29 In manual shift mode all six forward gears can be selected While using the MSM Manual Shift Mode feature the vehicle will have operation similar to a manual transmission You can use this for sport driving or when driving hilly roads to stay in gear longer or to downshift for more power or engine braking The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears appropriate for the vehicle speed The transmission will not automatically shift to the next higher gear without moving the shift lever The transmission will not allow shifting to the next lower gea
275. lt is already buckled neither the chime nor the light comes on Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Several seconds after the engine is started a chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt This only occurs if the passenger airbag is enabled See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 63 for more information The passenger safety belt light located on the instrument panel comes on and stays on for several seconds and then flashes for several more This chime and light are repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion 2 If the passenger safety belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light comes on The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase handbag grocery bag laptop or other electronic device To turn off the warning light and or chime remove the object from the seat or buckle the safety belt 3 27 Airbag Readiness Light There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem The system check includes the airbag sensor the pretensioners the airbag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module For more information on the airbag system see Airbag System on page 1 55 If th
276. lt phone name gt Yes or No followed by a tone Say Yes to delete the phone The system responds with OK deleting lt phone name gt 3 99 Linking to a Different Phone Using the Store Command 1 Press and hold for two seconds The system The store command allows a phone number to be responds with Ready followed by a tone stored without entering the digits individually 2 Say Bluetooth The system responds with 1 Press and hold amp for two seconds The system Bluetooth ready followed by a tone responds with Ready followed by a tone 3 Say Change phone The system responds with 2 Say Store The system responds with Please wait while search for other phones Store number please followed by a tone e f another phone is found the response will be 3 Say the complete phone number to be stored at lt Phone name gt is now connected once with no pauses e If another phone is not found the original phone e If the system recognizes the number it responds remains connected with OK Storing and repeats the phone number Storing Name Tags Ifthe system is unsure it recognizes the phone number it responds with Store and repeats the The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as number followed by Please say yes or no If the name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and number is correct say Yes If the number is not OnSt
277. lts A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the CAUTION Continued 1 40 CAUTION Continued inflating airbag A child in a forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 63 for additional information When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position study the instructions that came with your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
278. luid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water does not clean as well as washer fluid Fill the washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs which could damage the tank if it is completely full Do not use engine coolant antifreeze in your windshield washer It can damage the vehicle s windshield washer system and paint 5 32 Brakes Brake Fluid The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT DOT 3 3 brake fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the reservoir AR There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The brake fluid level goes down because of normal brake lining wear When new linings are installed the fluid level goes back up A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also cause a low fluid level Have the brake hydraulic system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well Do not top off the brake fluid Adding fluid does not correct a leak If fluid is added when the linings are worn there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed Add or remove brake fluid as necessary only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system A CAUTION If too much brake fluid is added it can spill on the engine and burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and the vehicle
279. mation Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings HORN LIGHTS OFF There will be no feedback when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter LIGHTS ONLY The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter HORN CHIRP ONLY The horn will sound on the second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter HORN LIGHTS ON default The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous command NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain 3 59 To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC REMOTE UNLOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 for more information Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle
280. ment Also check for damaged tires or wheels See When It ls Time for New Tires on page 5 67 and Wheel Replacement on page 5 72 5 66 When rotating the vehicle s tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire rotation After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 58 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 217 Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System See Tire When It Is Time for New Tires Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 62 Various factors such as maintenance temperatures driving speeds vehicle loading and road conditions influence when you need new tires Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened See Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page 5 103 One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to AN CAUTION check the treadwear ee indicators which appear Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to S when your tires have only which it is fastened can make wheel nuts i 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less become loose after time The wheel could E of tread remaining Some come off and cause an accident When you V commercial truck tires may change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from w not have treadwear places where the wheel attaches to the gt 2 indicators vehicle In an emergenc
281. ming additional keys only If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate you must see your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to have keys made and programmed to the system See your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to get a new key blank that is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system To program the new additional key 1 Verify that the new key has a stamped on it 2 Insert the original already programmed key in the ignition and start the engine If the engine will not start see your dealer retailer for service 3 After the engine has started turn the key to LOCK OFF and remove the key 4 Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to the ON RUN position within five seconds of removing the original key The security light will turn off once the key has been programmed 5 Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed If you lose or damage your PASS Key Ill key see your dealer retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key Ill to have a new key made Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break In Notice The vehicle does not need an elaborate break in But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines Do not drive at any one constant speed fas
282. most vehicles Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber glove box literature Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar After the first prepaid year contact OnStar to select a monthly or annual subscription payment plan If a payment plan is not selected the OnStar system and all services including airbag notification and emergency services may be deactivated and no longer available For more information visit onstar com U S or onstar ca Canada or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services described below or for a full description of OnStar services and system limitations see the OnStar Owner s Guide in the glove box or visit onstar com U S or onstar ca Canada contact OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR 1 888 466 7827 or TTY 1 877 248 2080 or press the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day 7 days a week 2 39 OnStar Services Available with the Safe amp Sound Plan Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment Advanced Automatic Crash Notification AACN If equipped Link to Emergency Services Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicl
283. mpensate for road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down That way the volume level should sound about the same while driving To activate SCV ils 2 Set the radio volume to the desired level Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM automatic volume tab on the radio display Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed Compensated Volume setting OFF Low Med or High to select the level of radio volume compensation The display times out after approximately 10 seconds Each higher setting allows for more radio volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Finding a Station BAND Press to switch between AM FM or XM if equipped The selection displays J Tune Turn to select radio stations K SEEK pl Press the arrows to go to the previous or to the next station and stay there To scan stations press and hold either arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds The radio goes to a station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next station Press either arrow again to stop scanning The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band i Information Base Radio with CD Press to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time When the ignition is off press to display the time i Information XM Satellite Radio Service MP3 WMA and RDS Features Press t
284. mperature indicator light will turn on If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions and the temperature indicator light comes on you should pull off the road stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible Tire Pressure Light For vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system this light comes on briefly when the engine e is started It provides information about tire pressures and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System When the Light is On Steady This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly underinflated A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center DIC can accompany the light See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 for more information Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so If a tire is underinflated inflate to the proper pressure See Tires on page 5 51 for more information 3 33 When the Light Flashes First and Then is On Steady This indicates that there could be a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitor System The light flashes for about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the ignition cycle This sequence repeats with every ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 61 for more information Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light A computer system called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation monitors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control system
285. n page 3 49 Also see Electric Power Management on page 3 17 for more information 3 45 LEARN REMOTE KEY This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters to your vehicle To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle 1 Make sure the vehicle is in P Park 2 Press the vehicle information button until LEARN REMOTE KEY PRESS V TO BEGIN displays 3 Press the set reset button until REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed 4 Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter at the same time for about 15 seconds A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched 5 To match additional transmitters at this time repeat Step 3 Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it 6 To exit the programming mode you must cycle the key to LOCK OFF 3 46 CALIBRATE COMPAS Compass Your vehicle may have this feature The compass can be manually calibrated To calibrate the compass through the DIC see DIC Compass on page 3 47 CHANGE COMPASS ZONE Your vehicle may have this feature To change the compass zone through the DIC see DIC Compass on page 3 47 Blank Display This display shows no information FEATURE SETTNGS Settings PRESS V TO SELCT Select This display allows you to personalize the feature settings on your vehicle See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3 57 for more information DIC Compass Your vehicle may have a compass
286. n wherever it appears in this manual This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about the vehicle s features and controls Pictures symbols and words work together to explain vehicle operation Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference Litho in U S A Part No 15910163 B Second Printing Canadian Owners Canadian Owners Propri taires Canadiens A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer retailer or from On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en fran ais aupr s du concessionnaire ou a l adresse suivante Helm Incorporated P O Box 07130 Detroit MI 48207 1 800 551 4123 Num ro de poste 6438 de langue frangaise www helminc com Index To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the index in the back of the manual It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found 2008 General Motors Corporation All Rights Reserved Safety Warnings and Symbols A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means Do Not Do not do this or Do not let this happen A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the warning A CAUTION These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people Cautions tell what the hazard is and what
287. n snow can be in a serious situation Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby If possible use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 7 7 To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror A CAUTION Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle This may cause exhaust gases to get inside Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death If the vehicle is stuck in the snow Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe Check again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there Open a window about two inches 5 cm on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind to bring in fresh air CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that circulates the air inside the vehicle and set the fan speed to the highest setting See Climate Control System in the Index For more information about carbon monoxide see Engine Exhaust on page 2 35 Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You cannot see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear a
288. nania 1 10 Folding Seatback Passenger eceseeeeee 1 8 FUG eeen r e araa a REDET 5 5 Additives asrine ar radioa A EES 5 6 California Fuel ccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaees 5 6 Economy Driving sivinccisccacei ese cates ik or sd 4 2 Fuel cont Filling a Portable Fuel Container 5 5 10 Filling ithe Tank s 20 vie Eero 5 8 Fuels in Foreign Countries ceeeeeeeeee ee 5 7 ETa e E ET E E 3 40 Gasoline Octane inrsin aAa e 5 5 Gasoline Specifications u sssseseeererereereree 5 6 Low Fuel Warning Light 222 rr renees 3 41 Fuses Engine Compartment Fuse Block 5 5 99 Fuses and Circuit Breakers eeeeeeeeees 5 97 Instrument Panel Fuse Block acceca 5 97 Windshield Wiper seeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 97 Gage Speedometer ccseeeceeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeeees 3 26 Tachometef nerian ana e 3 26 Gages Engine Coolant Temperature 1 3 33 Buel ae sadr oa eie aa aeiae 3 40 Trip Odometer ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 26 Gasoline OCTANE SEE Eee 5 5 Specifications kaii she aide ve eee 5 6 Gate Ajar Light c n ea a aki 3 40 GIOVE BOX wien cicecdetanetcdntarnaceuntamenbentedcandedae a 2 42 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 06 5 7 7 Halogen Bulbs zoo soens 5 44 Hazard Warning Flashers ceceeeeeeee eee eee ee 3 6 Head Restraints wsisciscceciieasncuene athe retescse ce h
289. nce II and then alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter However in some cases Maintenance II may be required more often Maintenance I Use Maintenance I if the light message displays within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed Maintenance II Use Maintenance H if the previous service performed was Maintenance I Always use Maintenance II whenever the light message displays 10 months or more since the last service or if the light message has not come on at all for one year Scheduled Maintenance Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Change engine oil and filter See Engine Oil on page 5 15 Reset oil life system See Engine Oil Life System on page 5 18 An Emission Control Service Visually check for any leaks or damage See footnote k Inspect engine air cleaner filter If necessary replace filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 19 See footnote Inspect brake system See footnote a Check engine coolant power steering fluid 3 6L V6 engine only and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed Perform any needed additional services See Additional Required Services in this section Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 66 and Tire Wear Inspection in At Least Once a Month on page 6 11 Scheduled Maintenance cont d Replace passenger compartment air filter
290. nd can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service In addition for U S customers should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts See your dealer for information regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs 7 12 Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty repair Rental reimbursement will be limited and must be supported by original receipts This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state provincial local and rental vehicle provider requirements Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements insurance coverage credit card etc You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes levies usage fees excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental Additional Program Information All program options such as shuttle service may not be available at every dealer Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be admi
291. nded 5 Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes after the on indicator is lit Additional Factors Affecting System Operation Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status See Safety Belts and Child Restraints in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket or cushion or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers seat heaters and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle on page 1 68 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates A CAUTION Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system 1 67 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle Your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system To purchase
292. nder any desired tag option during DVD playback See the tag options listed below for more information The rear seat operator navigates the DVD A menus and controls through the remote control See Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 108 for more information The Video Screen does not automatically power on when the DVD A is inserted into the DVD slot It must be manually turned on by the rear seat occupant through the remote control power button gt il Play Pause Press either play or pause displayed on the radio system to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD If the forward arrow is showing on the display the system is in pause mode If the pause icon is showing on the display the system is in playback mode lt Group gt Press to cycle through musical groupings on the DVD A disc Nav Navigate Press to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus d Audio Stream Press to cycle through audio steam formats located on DVD A disc There is not any type of notification for the customer to see through the radio display but video screen has a text field that shows audio stream changing Inserting a Disc To play a disc gently insert the disc with the label side up into the loading slot The DVD player might not accept some paper labeled media The player starts loading the disc into the system and display Loading Disc on the radio displa
293. ne An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan Hood Release To open the hood do the following 1 Pull the handle with this symbol on it It is located inside the vehicle to the left of the brake pedal 2 Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up on the secondary hood release lever 3 Lift the hood release the hood prop from its retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in the hood Before closing the hood be sure all the filler caps are on properly Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer Then just let the hood down and close it firmly Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood on the 3 4L V6 here is what you will see a 76 D NG Be A Y Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 19 Engine Oil Fill Cap See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 15 Engine Oil Dipstick See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 15 Brake Fluid Reservoir See Brakes on page 5 32 Engine Compartment Fuse Block See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 97 G page 5 36 Remote Positive Terminal See Jum
294. neck injury You might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest ys SAY N A SET J g KK AT pea pP The belt is behind the body 1 23 Q What is wrong with this A CAUTION You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer retailer to fix it a b The belt is twisted across the body 1 24 Lap Shoulder Belt All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap shoulder belt The following instructions explain how to wear a lap shoulder belt properly 1 Adjust the seat if the seat is adjustable so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 2 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The lap shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all the way the child restraint locking feature may be engaged If this happens let the belt go back all the
295. ned threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design Roof rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal impacts near frontal impacts or rear impacts Both roof rail airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over In any particular crash no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal airbags inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down For roof rail airbags deployment is determined by the location and severity of the side impact In a rollover event roof rail airbag deployment is determined by the direction of the roll What Makes an Airbag Inflate In a deployment event the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy The inflator the airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag module Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel For vehicles with roof rail airbags there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle near the side windows that have occupant seating positions How Does an Airbag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near fron
296. ng Over Things That Burn s 2 34 Engine Exnaust 2 rise sensorer er SE 2 35 Running the Vehicle While Parked 2 36 MUNPONS oi incchicid cciancths Madani aa 2 37 Manual Rearview Mirror eccerre 2 37 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror 2 37 Outside Power Mirrors 0eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 38 Outside Convex Mirrors ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 38 2 1 Section 2 Features and Controls OnStar System 2 0 0 0 maar kerne brak 2 39 Rear Compartment Storage Panel Cover 2 45 Storage Areas cece cc ccc cece teeneeeeeeeeenees 2 42 Rear Seat Armrest 2 2 47 Glove BOX eee eee er rrer 2 42 Table ELLE LEE REEF REE ERE DEERE FEEL ESF EEK LED ELDELE FEE E LEE FEEEEEE 2 47 Gupho lders pisiseeni i ee kiani a 2 42 Convenience Net sssssseresererensreerennnenes 2 48 Center Console Storage sec 2 42 Cargo Tie DOWNS eceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eritis 2 48 Luggage Carrier sr gror sn er eee eee ag 2 43 SUF aerae n i iaiia oan eons 2 49 Keys A CAUTION Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children
297. ng hot items on the surface of the table could damage it Always be sure that the items that are placed on the surface of the table are of moderate temperature There are four hooks located on the table that can be used for grocery bags Convenience Net Use the convenience net located in the rear to store small loads as far forward as possible The net should not be used to store heavy loads Cargo Tie Downs Four cargo tie downs are located in the rear compartment of the vehicle The tie downs can be used to secure small loads Sunroof If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof the controls to operate it are located on the headliner above the rearview mirror The ignition must be in RUN ON or ACC ACCESSORY or Retained Accessory Power RAP must be active to operate the sunroof See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 21 for more information To express open the sunroof glass panel and sunshade press the switch rearward and release it To stop the sunroof before it is completely open press the switch rearward again The sunshade cannot be closed with the sunroof open To close the sunroof press forward and hold the switch until the sunroof stops lifts and seals at the back of the sunroof glass Press forward on the switch again to make sure the sunroof is fully closed To put the sunroof in the vent position pull down on the front of the switch Push up on the front of the switch to close it 2 49
298. ng until the next step The other end of the negative cable does not go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery Connect the other end of the negative cable at least 18 inches 45 cm away from the dead battery but not near engine parts that move The electrical connection is just as good there and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less Your vehicle has a remote negative terminal for this purpose 5 39 11 Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while 12 Press the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter to disarm your content theft deterrent system 13 Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery If it will not start after a few tries it probably needs service Notice If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal 5 40 Jumper Cable Removal Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal Good Battery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal To disconnect the
299. nistered by appropriate dealer personnel General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion Collision Damage Repair If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle s resale value and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle s designed appearance durability and safety are preserved The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes In most cases the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle s originally designed appearance and safety performance however the history of these parts is not known Such parts are
300. not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any related failures are not covered by that warranty Aftermarket collision parts are also available These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for your vehicle As a result these parts may fit poorly exhibit premature durability corrosion problems and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by that warranty Repair Facility We recommend that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs Your dealer retailer may have a collision repair center with GM trained technicians and state of the art equipment or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM trained technicians and comparable equipment Insuring Your Vehicle Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts When purchasing insurance we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
301. not done the oil dipstick might not show the actual level 2 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross hatched area at the tip of the dipstick add at least one quart liter of the recommended oil This section explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity see Capacities and Specifications on page 5 103 Notice Do not add too much oil If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range the engine could be damaged See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine IZA oil fill cap AAAA SAE 5W 30 AR SAE 5W 30 may not appear on all caps Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range in the cross hatched area Push the dipstick all the way back in when through What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for three things RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS HOT WEATHER FIT c LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL AND GM STANDARD GM6094M DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED COLD WEATHER e GM6094M Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M e SAE 5W 30 SAE 5W 30 is best for the vehicle These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness
302. not falling off the shoulder Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash Squeeze the release buttons A together and move the height adjuster to the desired position After the height adjuster is set to the desired position try to move it up or down without squeezing the release buttons to make sure it has locked into position Safety Belt Pretensioners This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front outboard occupants Although the safety belt pretensioners cannot be seen they are part of the safety belt assembly They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met Pretensioners work only once If the pretensioners activate in a crash they will need to be replaced and probably other new parts for the vehicle s safety belt system See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1 71 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head 1 27 There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt 1 Remove the guide
303. nstruction E Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches F Service Description These characters represent the load index and speed rating of the tire The load index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission power steering power brakes power windows power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread 5 55 Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascals kPa before a tire has built up heat from driving See Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 58 Curb Weight The weight of a motor v
304. nt eee 1 40 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children EAT CH zeer eee 1 42 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position ccceeeeeeeeeeeee eee ees 1 49 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position ee 1 52 Airbag System eeren ereere 1 55 Where Are the Airbags cceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 58 When Should an Airbag Inflate ee 1 60 What Makes an Airbag Inflate e 1 61 How Does an Airbag Restrain ceee 1 61 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 62 Passenger Sensing System eseeeeeeeees 1 63 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 68 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle o ae 1 68 Restraint System Check 0 eeeeee es 1 70 Checking the Restraint Systems 08 1 70 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash cccceeceececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 1 71 1 1 Front Seats Manual Seats A CAUTION You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving 1 2 If the vehicle has a manual seat it can be moved forward or rearward 1 Lift the bar to unlock the seat 2 Slide the seat to the desired positi
305. ntion and a quick decision If holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions it can be turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery The vehicle s right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches 8 to 13 cm about one eighth turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing Passing another vehicle on a two lane road can be dangerous To reduce the risk of danger while passing Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect a successful pass If in doubt wait Watch for traffic signs pavement markings and lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection Never cross a solid or double solid line on your side of the lane Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
306. nto Park on page 2 32 If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer see Towing a Trailer on page 4 34 Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it for a clearer view of behind your vehicle Adjust the mirror to reduce the glare of headlamps from behind you Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use Vehicles with OnStar have three additional control buttons located at the bottom of the mirror See your dealer retailer for more information on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar See OnStar System on page 2 39 for more information about the services OnStar provides Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it for a clearer view of behind your vehicle Adjust the mirror to reduce the glare of headlamps from behind you Press AUTO or O located in the lower center of the mirror to turn automatic dimming on or off The indicator light comes on when this feature is on For vehicles with OnStar press the db located on the lower part of the mirror for up to six seconds to turn automatic dimming on or off Vehicles with OnStar have three additional control buttons located at the bottom of the mirror See your dealer retailer for more information on the system and how to subscribe to OnStar See OnStar System on page 2 39 for more information about the services OnStar provides 2 37 Outside Power Mirr
307. o receive signals from the remote control If the remote control does not seem to be working the batteries may need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section Objects blocking the line of sight can also affect the function of the remote control If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot the remote control power button can be used to turn on the video screen display and start the disc The radio can also turn on the video screen display See Radio s on page 3 67 for more information Notice Storing the remote control in a hot area or in direct sunlight can damage it and the repairs will not be covered by the warranty Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries Keep the remote control stored in a cool dry place Remote Control Buttons D Power Press this button to turn the video screen on and off 3 Illumination Press this button to turn the remote control backlight on The backlight automatically times out after 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while the backlight is on aa Title Press this button to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD This function varies for each disc Main Menu Press this button to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD menu After making a selection press the enter button This button only operates when using a DVD A V lt P Menu Navigation Ar
308. o display additional text information related to the current FM RDS or XM station or MP3 WMA song A choice of additional information such as Channel Song Artist and CAT category can appear Continue pressing to highlight the desired tab or press the pushbutton positioned under any one of the tabs and the information about that tab displays When information is not available No Info displays Setting Preset Stations If the radio does not have XM up to 18 stations six FM1 six FM2 and six AM can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press BAND to select FM1 FM2 or AM 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep sounds When that pushbutton is pressed and released the station that was set returns 5 Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton 3 69 Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station favorites while the vehicle is parked Tune to favorite stations using the presets favorites button and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them See Defensive Driving on page 4 2 If the radio has XM a maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio favorites page button FAV button FAV Favorites Press t
309. o display screen audio video jacks two wireless headphones and a remote control See Radio s on page 3 67 for more information on the vehicle s audio DVD system Parental Control The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature depending on which radio the vehicle has To enable Parental Control press and hold the radio power button for more than two seconds to stop all system features such as radio video screen RSA DVD and or CD While Parental Control is on a padlock icon displays When the radio is turned back on Parental Control is unlocked Before Driving The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only The driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving and should not try to do so In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE system might not work until the temperature is within the operating range The operating range for the RSE system is above 4 F 20 C or below 140 F 60 C If the temperature of the vehicle is outside of this range heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature is within the operating range of the RSE system Headphones The RSE includes two sets of wireless headphones that are only dedicated to this system These headphones are used to listen to the DVD radio or an auxiliary device connected to the RCA jacks The wireless headphones have an ON OFF switch and a volume control To use the headphones turn the switch to ON An indicator light located on the h
310. of GM s defense of litigation through the discovery process or as required by law Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner OnStar If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the OnStar services please refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions for information on data collection and use See also OnStar System on page 2 39 in this manual for more information Navigation System If your vehicle has a navigation system use of the system may result in the storage of destinations addresses telephone numbers and other trip information Refer to the navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions Radio Frequency Identification RFID RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door locking unlocking and starting and in vehicle transmitters for garage door openers RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other GM system containing personal information 4 NOTES 7 20 A Accessories and Modifications ceceeeeeeee 5 3 Accessory POWET ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerenees 2 21 Access
311. of the P Park position The regular headlamp system should be turned on when needed Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside and the exterior lamps control is in the automatic position the headlamps come on automatically See Headlamps on page 3 13 The vehicle has a light sensor located on top of the instrument panel Make sure it is not covered or the headlamps will be on when they are not needed The system may also turn on the headlamps when driving through a parking garage or tunnel Fog Lamps For vehicles with fog lamps the button is located on the instrument panel above the radio Use the fog lamps for better visibility in foggy or misty conditions The parking lamps or low beam headlamps must be on to use the fog lamps 40 Press to turn the fog lamps on or off The fog lamp button is lit when the lamps are on The fog lamps will go off whenever the high beam headlamps are turned on When the high beam headlamps are turned off the fog lamps will come on again Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps Instrument Panel Brightness This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights The control for this feature is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column Turn the control up to brighten the lights or down to dim them 3 15 Dome Lamp For vehicles with a dome lamp move the lever to ch
312. of water the vehicle s electrical system might be wet The condition is usually corrected when the electrical system dries out A few driving trips should turn the light off Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed and can cause stalling after start up stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear misfiring hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up If one or more of these conditions occurs change the fuel brand used It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off See Gasoline Octane on page 5 5 If none of the above have made the light turn off your dealer retailer can check the vehicle The dealer retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed 3 35 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local governments have or might begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on the vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass an inspection The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on with the engine running or if the key is in ON RUN and the light is not on The vehicle will not pass
313. oil removal Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers can leave residue that streaks and attracts dirt For liquid cleaners about 20 drops per gallon 3 78 L of water is a good guide Use only mild neutral pH soaps Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery Organic solvents such as naptha alcohol etc that can damage the vehicle s interior Fabric Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats For any soil always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda Before cleaning gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques e For liquids gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed e For solid dry soils remove as much as possible and then vacuum To clean 1 Saturate a lint free clean white cloth with water or club soda 2 Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture 3 Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center Continue cleaning using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 4 Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean 5 If the soil is not completely removed use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that wa
314. olly Towing All Wheel Drive Vehicles with a 6 speed Transmission To tow a front wheel drive vehicle from the front with two wheels on the ground Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer s instructions Drive the front wheels onto the dolly Shift the transmission to P Park Firmly set the parking brake Clamp the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing All wheel drive vehicles must not be towed with two wheels on the ground To properly tow these vehicles they should be placed on a platform truck or trailer with all four wheels off of the ground or dinghy towed from the front Towing the Vehicle From the Rear Notice Towing the vehicle from the rear could damage it Also repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Never have the vehicle towed from the rear 4 33 Towing a Trailer A CAUTION The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all The driver and passengers could be seriously injured The vehicle may also be damaged the resulting repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed Ask your dealer retailer
315. ompletely closed Driving with the liftgate open can cause carbon monoxide CO to enter the vehicle See Engine Exhaust on page 2 35 for more information Door Ajar Light This light will come on when a door is open Before driving check that all doors are properly closed 3 40 Service Vehicle Soon Light J If the light comes on see your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible Fuel Gage This light comes on if a condition exists that requires the vehicle to be taken in for service When the ignition is on pe the fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left in your tank An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on When the indicator nears empty the low fuel light will come on You still have a little fuel left but you should get more soon See Low Fuel Warning Light on page 3 41 for more information Here are four things that some owners ask about None of these show a problem with your fuel gage At the service station the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up The gage takes a few seconds to stabilize after the ignition is turned on
316. on Reputable shops welcome this opportunity Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair If you have a pre determined repair facility of choice take your vehicle there or have it towed there Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts Remember recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty Insurance pays the bill for the repair but you must live with the repair Depending on your policy limits your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts Discuss this with your repair professional and insist on Genuine GM parts Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost If another party s insurance company is paying for the repairs you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company s collision policy repair limits as you have no contractual limits with that company In such cases you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within reasonable limits Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect w
317. on and release the bar Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place Seat Height Adjuster Power Seat To manually raise or lower the seat move the lever To adjust the seat repeatedly upward or downward Slide the control forward or rearward to move the seat forward or rearward Move the front and rear of the control up or down to raise or lower the front and rear part of the seat cushion Manual Lumbar On vehicles with this feature the knob is located on the front of the driver seat lower cushion on the inboard side Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the lumbar support Heated Seats On vehicles with heated o seats the switches are located on the instrument panel near the climate y controls YET CO Cc The vehicle must be on for the heated seats to operate Press the switch nearest to the seat once to turn the heated seat on to the high setting Both indicator lights will be lit Press the switch a second time to turn the heated seat to the low setting One indicator light will be lit Press the switch a third time to turn the heated seat off Manual Reclining Seatbacks A CAUTION You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to A
318. one of these radios as its audio system If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system ithas a CD DVD radio See Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 108 for more information on the vehicle s RSE system The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate The player can read the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc Dolby is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories 3 67 Radio Data System RDS The vehicle s audio system may have Radio Data System RDS The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available While the radio is tuned to an FM RDS station the station name or call letters appear on the display In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station Playing the Radio D Power Volume Press to turn the system on and off Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume 3 68 Speed Compensated Volume SCV The vehicle s audio system may also have Speed Compensated Volume SCV While SCV is on the radio volume automatically adjusts to co
319. ons and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably For the oil life system to work properly the system must be reset every time the oil is changed When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it indicates that an oil change is necessary A change engine oil light and a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message come on Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1 000 km It is possible that if driving under the best conditions the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer retailer has trained service people who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally the oil must be changed at 3 000 miles 5 000 km since the last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use Whenever the oil is changed reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a change engin
320. ontrol under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 108 for more information The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of most DVDs The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most audio CDs CD R CD RW DVD Video DVD Audio DVD R RW DVD R RW media along with MP3 and WMA formats If an error message appears on the video screen or the radio see DVD Display Error Messages under Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 108 and DVD Radio Error Messages in this section for more information 3 80 Playing a DVD DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text tab and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and does not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front AUX and Rear AUX if available See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System on page 3 108
321. ood 5 10 Hood Release ra arne ore led 5 11 Engine Compartment Overview 5 12 Engine Oil siiesctcienstdcatatecwseindsdiyscdyedeumententwces 5 15 Engine Oil Life System cee 5 18 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 0c ee 5 19 Automatic Transmission Fluid eeeeeee 5 21 Cooling SYSTEM orsak ninn adage an altace 5 22 Engine Coolant ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeea ees 5 23 Engine Overheating c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 28 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 30 Power Steering Fluid esceeeeeeneee eee ees 5 30 Windshield Washer Fluid eeeeeeeeeee es 5 31 Brakes esner haa he tanicas S E 5 32 Battery sissien a RE 5 35 JUMP Starting aeri soens ce eie 5 36 All Wheel Drive 0 eeen 5 41 Headlamp Aiming ccceeeeeeenee eee nerne 5 43 Bulb Replacement ceeeeeeeneeeeeee eens 5 44 Halogen BUDS seinien aea br uha be aaaea 5 44 Headlamps Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking Lamps 22222 onen re 5 44 Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back up Lamps sisca sker targus obeaseegnaeds 5 47 License Plate Lamp 2222222 ar uge 5 48 Replacement Bulbs c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 49 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 5 49 MeS 32 civeat han araetitiet E E oe sa eos 5 51 Tire Sidewall Labeling eseeeeeeeeee
322. or death to you or others Do not give extended attention to With RAP the audio system can be played even after entertainment tasks while driving the ignition is turned off See Retained Accessory Power RAP on page 2 21 for more information The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power RAP This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving do the following while the vehicle is parked e Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system Set up the tone speaker adjustments and preset radio stations 3 64 Setting the Clock AM FM Base Radio with a Single CD Player If the vehicle has a AM FM Base Radio with a Single CD Player it has a button for setting the time To adjust the time 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press the button until the hour begins flashing on the display Press a second time and the minutes begin flashing on the display 3 While either the hour or the minutes are flashing do one of the following to increase or decrease the time e Press bl SEEK or K SEEK Press DD FWD or lt lt REV e Turn d clockwise or counter clockwise 4 Press again until the clock display stops flashing to set the currently displayed time otherwise the flashing stops after five seconds and the current time displayed is automatically set MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a Single CD and DVD Player If the vehic
323. orking properly CAT Not Found There are no channels available for the selected category The system is working properly XM Theftlocked The XM receiver in the vehicle could have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message is received after having the vehicle serviced check with your dealer retailer XM Radio ID If tuned to channel 0 this message alternates with the XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label This label is needed to activate the service Unknown If this message is received when tuned to channel 0 there could be a receiver fault Consult with your dealer retailer Check XM Receivr If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer XM Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer retailer Navigation Radio System For vehicles with a navigation radio system see the separate Navigation System manual Bluetooth Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and receive phone calls The system can be used while the key is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY position The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft 9 1 m Not all phones support all functions and not all phones are guaranteed to work with the in v
324. ors Controls for the outside power mirrors are located on the instrument panel To adjust the mirrors 1 Move the selector switch to the left or right to choose the driver or passenger mirror 2 Press the corresponding edges of the round control pad to move each mirror to the desired direction 3 Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen 2 38 Outside Convex Mirrors A CAUTION A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on the right Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes The passenger side mirror is convex shaped A convex mirror s surface is curved so more can be seen from the drivers seat OnStar System OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live advisors to provide a wide range of safety security information and convenience services If the airbags deploy the system is designed to make an automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request emergency services be sent to your location If the keys are locked in the vehicle call OnStar at 1 888 4 ONSTAR to have a signal sent to unlock the doors OnStar Hands Free Calling including 30 trial minutes good for 60 days is available on most vehicles OnStar Turn by Turn Navigation service with one trial route is available on
325. ory Power Outlets ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 18 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle o an 1 68 Additional Required Services Scheduled Maintenance eeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 6 7 Additives Fuel c cccccceceeceeeeeteeeeeeneeseneees 5 6 Add On Electrical Equipment ceeeeeeee ees 5 96 Adjustments Headlamp Range eeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenees 1 7 Air Cleaner Filter Engine cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 19 Air Conditioning 2 02 02 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee een eeees 3 19 Air Filter Passenger Compartment 00 3 23 Airbag Readiness Light arrene eder areas 3 28 Airbag System cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeees 1 55 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle eeeeeeee 1 68 How Does an Airbag Restrain eeeee 1 61 Passenger Sensing System eeeeeeeeeeees 1 63 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 68 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 0 1 61 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 62 When Should an Airbag Inflate 08 1 60 Where Are the Airbags ceeeeeeeeeee eee es 1 58 Airbags Passenger Status Indicators 3 29 AIEWh ee DIVE ass kreerede 5 41 All Wheel Drive Disabled Light eee 3 39 All Wheel Drive AWD System 4 9 All Wheel Drive Service Light ceeeeeeeees 3 39 Antilock Brake System
326. ou can hit things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the vehicle You and your passenger s can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passenger s are restrained properly too A CAUTION It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the safety belts See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3 27 for additional information In most states and in all Canadian provinces the law requires wearing safety belts Here is why You never know if you will be in a crash If you do have a crash you do not know if it will be a serious one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person would not survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without safety belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Wor
327. ou start steering quickly enough the vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until the vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt Remember Any Antilock Brake System ABS helps avoid only the braking skid Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Night driving tips include Drive defensively Do not drink and drive Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside rearview mirror Slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles because headlamps can only light up so much road ahead Watch for animals When tired pull off the road Do not
328. ough the audio system speakers See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information OnStar Virtual Advisor OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling that uses minutes to access location based weather local traffic reports and stock quotes Press the phone button and give a few simple voice commands to browse through the various topics See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information This feature is only available in the continental U S OnStar Steering Wheel Controls This vehicle may have a Talk Mute button that can be used to interact with OnStar Hands Free Calling See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 117 for more information On some vehicles the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voice mail systems or to dial phone extensions See the OnStar Owner s Guide for more information How OnStar Service Works The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle information This information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed the emergency button is pressed or if the airbags or AACN system deploy This information usually includes the vehicle s GPS location and in the event of a crash additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle was involved in e g the direction from which the vehicle was hit When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar Hands Free Calling is used the vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle s GPS locat
329. our dealer retailer i Ge a eta Page MecaSe On Pagea 1 Halogen Bulbs A CAUTION Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package OVERTE NA IRL LLRI LETTER TT as ig F IY 2 Carefully pry out the center of the push pins from the top of the radiator cover 5 44 3 Gently pull the radiator cover front grill toward you and pull the front grill trim bar away from the headlamp lens The front grill bar is attached to the headlamp lens with a hidden clip 4 Remove the three headlamp assembly attachment screws 5 Pull the radiator cover front grill toward you and pull the headlamp assembly up and out from the vehicle A Parking Lamp B Sidemarker Lamp 5 46 C Low High Beam Headlamp D Turn Signal Lamp 6 Press the clip A on the electrical connector when replacing the low beam or high beam bulb then pull it straight off Turn the bulb retaining ring B counterclockwise to remove it and then pull the bulb assembly straight out For all other bulbs turn the socket counterclockwise and pull it out from the headlamp assembly Pull the bulb straight out from the socket Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the socket into the headlamp assembly by turning it clockwise For the low beam or high beam bulb install the new bulb being
330. ove up or down This is normal If there is a problem an alert will be displayed The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high This is true for all vehicles This is because the generator alternator may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on such as headlamps high beams fog lamps rear window defogger climate control fan at high speed heated seats engine cooling fans trailer loads and loads plugged into accessory power outlets EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery It does this by balancing the generator s output and the vehicle s electrical needs It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power whenever needed It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories Normally these actions occur in steps or levels without being noticeable In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action this action may be noticeable to the driver If so a Driver Information Center DIC message might be displayed such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW or LOW BATTERY If this message is displayed it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 Battery Run Down Protection The vehicle has a battery saver feature designed to prote
331. ows an estimate of the oil s remaining useful life If you see 99 OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display that means 99 of the current oil life remains The engine oil life system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions When the remaining oil life is low the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display along with the Change Engine Oil Light on the instrument panel cluster See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3 49 and Change Engine Oil Light on page 3 37 You should change the oil as soon as possible See Engine Oil on page 5 15 In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information Remember you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after each oil change It will not reset itself Also be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change To reset the engine oil life system see Engine Oil Life System on page 5 18 UNITS Press the vehicle information button until UNITS displays This display allows you to select between English or Metric units of measurement Once in this display press the set reset button to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES
332. p Fuel Press this button to scroll through the following displays ODOMETER Press the trip fuel button until ODOMETER displays This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles mi or kilometers km This display will also show the outside air temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit F or degrees Celsius C To change the DIC display to English or metric units see UNITS later in this section TRIP Press the trip fuel button until TRIP displays This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles mi or kilometers km since the last reset for the trip odometer This display will also show the outside air temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit F or degrees Celsius C The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the set reset button while the trip odometer is displayed AVG Average SPD Speed Press the trip fuel button until AVG Average SPD Speed displays This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in miles per hour mph or kilometers per hour km h This average is calculated based on the various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of this value To reset the value press and hold the set reset button The display will return to zero AVG Average ECON Economy Press the trip fuel button until AVG Average ECON Economy displays This display shows the approximate average miles per gallon mpg or liters per 100 kilomet
333. p Starting on Engine Coolant Surge Tank See Engine Coolant on page 5 23 Washer Fluid on page 5 31 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Windshield When you open the hood on the 3 6L V6 here is what you will see Engine Air Cleaner Filter See Engine Air Cleaner Filter on page 5 19 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Out of View See Power Steering Fluid on page 5 30 Engine Oil Fill Cap Out of View See When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 15 Engine Oil Dipstick See Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil on page 5 15 Brake Fluid Reservoir See Brake Fluid under Brakes on page 5 32 Underhood Fuse Block See Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 5 99 Remote Positive Terminal See Jump Starting on page 5 36 Engine Coolant Recovery Tank See Cooling System on page 5 22 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir See Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5 31 Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each fuel fill In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for the location of the engine oil dipstick 1 Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan If this is
334. pear Press the vehicle information button until DISPLAY LANG Language appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings ENGLISH default All messages will appear in English FRENCH All messages will appear in French SPANISH All messages will appear in Spanish NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC 3 58 AUTO LOCK This feature allows you to select when the vehicle s doors will automatically lock See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2 11 for more information Press the vehicle information button until AUTO LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings OUT OF PARK default The vehicle s doors automatically lock when the doors are closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P Park AT SPEED The vehicle s doors automatically lock when the vehicle speed is above 5 mph 8 km h for three seconds NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain To select a setting press the set reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC AUTO UNLO
335. ph 40 km h When the brakes are applied the cruise control shuts off If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction Control System TCS begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control automatically disengages See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 7 When road conditions allow the cruise control can be used again A CAUTION Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed So do not use the cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip and you could lose control Do not use cruise control on slippery roads A CAUTION If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control The cruise control buttons are located on the steering wheel On Off Press to turn the cruise control system on and off The indicator light is on when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise control is off RES Resume Press to resume a set speed and to accelerate the speed SET Set Press to set a speed and to decrease the speed Rg Cancel Press to cancel cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory Setting Cruise Control
336. portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread remains See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 67 UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5 71 Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg plus the rated cargo load See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 5 57 Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure See Tire and Loading Information Label under Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 Inflation Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively Notice Do not let anyone tell you that under inflation or over inflation is all right It is not If your tires do not have enough air under inflation you can get the following Too
337. pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt is not long enough your dealer retailer will order you an extender When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you To help avoid personal injury do not let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit The extender has been designed for adults Never use it for securing child seats To wear it attach it to the regular safety belt For more information see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender Child Restraints The manufacturer s instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster Use a booster seat with a lap shoulder belt Older Children until the child passes the below fit test Sit all the way back on the seat Do the knees bend at the seat edge If yes continue If no return to the booster seat Buckle the lap shoulder belt Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder If yes continue If no try using the rear safety belt comfort guide See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap Shoulder Belt on page 1 25 for more information If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder then return to the booster seat Does the lap belt fit low and snu
338. ps Taillamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights 2D D Headlamps Turns on the headlamps together with the previously listed lamps and lights Headlamps on Reminder If you open the driver s door with the ignition off and the lamps on you will hear a warning chime 3 13 Daytime Running Lamps DRL Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day Fully functional Daytime Running Lamps DRL are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada The DRL system will make the low beam headlamps come on at a reduced brightness in daylight when the following conditions are met The ignition is on The exterior lamp band is in the automatic position The transmission is not in P Park The light sensor determines it is daytime The parking brake is released When the DRL are on the low beam headlamps will be on at a reduced brightness The taillamps sidemarker instrument panel lights and other lamps will not be on When the exterior lamp band is turned to the headlamp position the low beam headlamps come on The other lamps that come on with the headlamps will also come on When the headlamps are turned off the regular lamps will go off and the low beam headlamps come on to the reduced brightness To idle your vehicle with the DRL off move the shift lever to P Park The DRL will stay off until the shift lever is moved out
339. quids and debris If an error displays see CD Messages later in this section amp EJECT Base Radio with CD Press to eject the CD If the CD is not removed after several seconds the CD automatically pulls back into the player A EJECT Press to eject CD s To eject the CD that is currently playing press and release this button A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD can be removed If the CD is not removed after several seconds the CD automatically pulls back into the player and begins playing For the Six Disc CD player press and hold for two seconds to eject all discs J Tune Turn to select tracks on the CD currently playing K SEEK D Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than ten seconds have played Press the right arrow to go to the next track If either arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through the tracks on the CD lt lt REV Fast Reverse Press and hold to reverse playback quickly within a track Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track displays bb FWD Fast Forward Press and hold to advance playback quickly within a track Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track displays 3 75 RDM Random Base Radio with CD Wi
340. r The roof rack crossrails can be locked in four positions only 2 43 Press the lever down and align the crossrails on both sides with the holes on the siderails Move the crossrail by hand There will be a notable click as the pins align into the holes locking the crossrail into place Make sure the lever is in the down position and that the crossrail cannot be moved by hand when it is in place 2 44 To reposition the crossrail pull up on the end levers of the crossrail to the upright position This releases the pins from the holes in the siderail and allows for the crossrail to be moved into a new position Notice Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 220 Ibs 100 kg or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as far forward as possible and against the side rails making sure to fasten it securely Do not stand on plastic lower body panels when loading cargo on the luggage carrier Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading the vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading see Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 To prevent damage or loss of cargo while driving check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier crossrails are locked and cargo is still securely fastened When the luggage
341. r CD RW Disc If the vehicle has a radio with a single CD MP3 WMA a six disc CD MP3 WMA or a radio with a CD and DVD player it is capable of playing an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW disc For more information on how to play an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW disc see Using an MP3 in the index CD Messages If these messages display and or the CD comes out it could be for one of the following reasons Optical Error If the disc was inserted upside down Disk Read Error If a disc was inserted with an invalid or unknown format Player Error If there are disc 7 or disc a problems CHECK DISC If this error message displays it could be for one of the following reasons Itis very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play The road is very rough When the road becomes smoother the CD should play The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again There could have been a problem while burning the CD The label could be caught in the CD player If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer retailer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer retailer when reporting the problem 3 79 Using the DVD Player The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the remote control by the RSA system or by the buttons on the radio faceplate See Remote C
342. r i Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Maintenance Record cont d Odometer i Maintenance I or i Reading Serviced By Maintenance II Services Performed Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information 7 2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure 068 7 2 Online Owner Center ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 5 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users 2 2 ee 7 6 Customer Assistance Offices eeeeeeeeeee 7 6 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program 7 7 Roadside Assistance Program eeeeeeee ees 7 7 Scheduling Service Appointments 0 7 11 Courtesy Transportation Program 0666 7 11 Collision Damage Repair ceeceeeeeeneeeeenes 7 13 Customer Assistance Information Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government 06 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Service Publications Ordering Information Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Event Data Recorders OnStar Navigation System Radio Frequency Identification RFID Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Chevrolet Normally any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved b
343. r if the vehicle speed is too high If the vehicle does not respond to a gear change or detects a problem with the transmission the range of gears may be reduced and the Malfunction Indicator Lamp will come on See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 34 2 30 Transmission Overheating If the transmission fluid temperature rises above 270 F 132 C or rises rapidly the Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light will flash See Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3 32 for more information When the transmission overheats it will go into a protection mode and will default into a different shift sequence to help cool the transmission fluid This shift sequence is the same for both D Drive position and manual mode Continue driving the vehicle in either position depending on the required vehicle speed and load Once the fluid temperature lowers to the normal temperature range the transmission will return to the normal shift patterns Towing or driving on long hills can cause the transmission fluid temperature to be higher than normal If the transmission fluid temperature will not cool you may need to pull over and check the transmission fluid level You should also check the engine coolant temperature If it is hot see Engine Overheating on page 5 28 2 Second and 3 Third Gear Start Feature When accelerating the vehicle from a stop in snowy and icy conditions you may want to select 2 Second and 3 Third
344. r on page 3 7 L Tilt Wheel on page 3 6 C Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3 25 M Horn on page 3 6 D Windshield Wipers on page 3 8 N Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3 117 E DIC Operation and Displays on page 3 42 O Audio System s on page 3 64 F Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3 6 P Shift Lever See Shifting Into Park on page 2 32 G Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 29 Q Traction Control System TCS on page 4 7 H Rear Window Wiper Washer on page 3 10 R Power Windows on page 2 15 Fog Lamps on page 3 15 S Climate Control System on page 3 19 Heated Seats Outside Power Mirrors on page 2 38 on page 1 4 If Equipped J Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3 15 T Glove Box on page 2 42 Hazard Warning Flashers A Hazard Warning Flasher Press this button located on the instrument panel to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off This warns others that you are having trouble Press A again to turn the flashers off Horn Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering wheel pad to sound the horn Tilt Wheel The vehicle has a tilt wheel that lets the steering wheel be adjusted The tilt lever is located on the left side of the steering column To tilt the wheel hold the steering wheel and push the lever down Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable position and pull the lever up firmly to lock the column in place Do not adjust the steering wheel while dri
345. r you have moved the shift lever into P Park hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from P Park without first pressing the button on the console shift lever If you can it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into P Park Torque Lock Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the transmission into P Park is not done properly and then it is difficult to shift out of P Park To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into P Park To find out how see Shifting Into P Park listed previously If torque lock does occur your vehicle may need to be pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking pawl pressure so you can shift out of P Park Shifting Out of Park The vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system The shift lock release is designed to Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in P Park with the shift lever button fully released and Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P Park unless the ignition is in ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage less than 9 volt battery 2 33 If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low volt
346. re of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 for more information Checking Coolant The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling do not do anything else until it cools down If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the COLD FILL mark add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done The surge tank is located on the driver s side of the engine compartment See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for more information on location When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line When your engine is warm the level should be at the COLD FILL line or a little higher The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line If it is not you may have a leak in the cooling system 5 25 How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank A CAUTION You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine Notice This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure Failure to follow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be
347. re to play MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW in order by artist or album Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator tab The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information It can take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3 WMA files recorded to the CD R or CD RW To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning press the pushbutton located below the music navigator tab or eject the disc The radio could begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the background When the scan is finished the CD R or CD RW begins playing again Once the disc has been scanned the player defaults to playing MP3 WMA files in order by artist The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display between the arrows To listen to MP3 WMA files by another artist press the pushbutton located below either arrow tab Continue pressing either button until the desired artist is displayed To change from playback by artist to playback by album press the pushbutton located below the Sort By tab From the sort screen push one of the buttons below the album button Press the pushbutton below the back tab to return to the main music navigator screen The aloum name displays on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begins to play Once all songs from that album are played the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD R CD
348. remains on during the same ignition cycle See Tire Pressure Light on page 3 33 Several conditions may cause this message to appear See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5 62 for more information If the warning comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the TPMS See your dealer retailer SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL This message displays when the Traction Control System TCS is not functioning properly A warning light also appears on the instrument panel cluster See Traction Control System TCS Warning Light on page 3 32 and Traction Control System TCS on page 4 7 for more information Have the TCS serviced by your dealer retailer as soon as possible SERVICE VEHICLE SOON This message displays when a non emissions related malfunction occurs Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer as soon as possible STABILITRAK NOT READY This message may display and a warning light on the instrument panel cluster may be on after first driving the vehicle and exceeding 30 mph 48 km h for 30 seconds See Traction Control System TCS Warning Light on page 3 32 The StabiliTrak System is not functional until the light has turned off See StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 for more information STABILITRAK OFF This message displays any time the StabiliTrak System turns off When this message has been displayed StabiliTrak is no longer available to assist you with directional control of the vehicle Adjust
349. replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer retailer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer retailer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to replace any of your wheels wheel bolts wheel nuts or Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors replace them only with new GM original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts wheel nuts and TPMS sensors for your vehicle A CAUTION Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you CAUTION Continued CAUTION Continued lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement Notice The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 76 for more information 5 73 Used Replacement Wheels A CAUTION Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dange
350. rm Tire Quality Grading on page 5 71 G Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load est OOK BSS ay ee 09 OL 31 ANV Compact Spare Tire Example A Temporary Use Only The compact spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately 3 000 miles 5 000 km and should not be driven at speeds over 65 mph 105 km h The compact spare tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat If your vehicle has a compact spare tire see Compact Spare Tire on page 5 87 and Ifa Tire Goes Flat on page 5 75 5 53 B Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread C Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following the DOT Department of Transportation code is the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture D Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load E Tire Inflation The temporary use tire or compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi 420 kPa For more information on tire pressure and inflation see nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 58 F Tire Size A combination of
351. rned off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades the vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating To avoid this let the engine run while parked preferably on level ground with the automatic transmission in P Park for a few minutes before turning the engine off If the overheat warning comes on see Engine Overheating on page 5 28 Parking on Hills A CAUTION Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be dangerous If something goes wrong the rig could start to move People can be injured and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged When possible always park the rig on a flat surface If parking the rig on a hill 1 Press the brake pedal but do not shift into P Park yet Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 Reapply the brake pedal Then apply the parking brake and shift into P Park 5 Release the brake pedal Leaving After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply and hold the brake pedal while you Start the engine Shift into a gear e Release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing The vehicle needs
352. rning Light ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 41 Driver Information Center DIC 0 3 42 DIC Operation and Displays cceeeeeeeeees 3 42 DIC Compass 0 ceceeeeeee eee eee eee eee nipeni 3 47 DIC Warnings and Messages e eeeeeeeeees 3 49 DIC Vehicle Personalization eeeeeeeeees 3 57 Instrument Panel Audio System s ccceeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeee ees 3 64 Setting the CIOCK cceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeee tea 3 65 Radios ate aaea ee ener AENA 3 67 Using an MP3 Radio with CD or Six Disc CD Player ccceeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 3 86 Using an MP3 Radio with CD and DVD Player 2 5 re aseeniamditadaadeendehns 3 91 XM Radio Messages ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee tees 3 96 Navigation Radio System ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 97 Bluetooth ssnipe areren EAEE SNES 3 97 Rear Seat Entertainment RSE System 3 108 Theft Deterrent Feature a a 3 117 Audio Steering Wheel Controls 2655 3 117 Radio Reception eceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeees 3 118 Multi Band Antenna irsinin tana 3 119 4 NOTES 3 3 Instrument Panel Overview 3 4 The main components of the instrument panel are the following A Outlet Adjustment on page 3 23 K Cruise Control on page 3 10 B Turn Signal Multifunction Leve
353. ront Seat Position eeeeeee neers 1 52 SOCUnIty LIGHT es seansanna o SiS 3 37 EE A daedeeaetiond mci 5 3 Accessories and Modifications 8 5 3 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle erea eta voces tenes E EAA 5 5 All Wheel Drive Light 2 3 39 Doing Your Own Work ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 4 Engine Soon Lamp vst sccstcsc cists naaieeciv sane 3 34 Publications Ordering Information 5 7 17 Scheduling Appointments e eeeeeeeeeeee 7 11 Vehicle Soon Light cceeseseeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 40 Service Parts Identification Label 008 5 96 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 68 Setting the Clock cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 65 Sheet Metal Damage 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 95 Shifting Out Pat EB SE En a ene 2 33 Shifting Into Parks rs elser kend 2 32 Signals Turn and Lane Change W W ssseeeerereee 3 7 Spare Tire COMPACT adie ER Eee E E E 5 87 Installing aa an hl tenet reb ENE Dre eee 5 79 REMOVING ereen s aa arne een ERE 5 77 SONN eea raa a een 5 85 Specifications and Capacities W dssseere 5 103 Speedometer eeeeeceeeeeceeeneeaeeaeeaeeaeeneeeeeaes 3 26 12 Split Folding Rear Seat 1 10 StabiliTrak System cccccccccceeeseseeeeeeeeeeeenees 4 6 Start Vehicle Remote ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeenees 2 7 Starting the Engine raids onen men
354. rous You cannot know how it has been used or how far it has been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new GM original equipment wheel 5 74 Tire Chains A CAUTION Do not use tire chains There is not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on the vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instructions To help avoid damage to the vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it is contacting the vehicle and do not spin the vehicle s wheels If you do find traction devices that will fit install them on the front tires If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving especially if you maintain your vehicle s tires properly If air goes out of a tire it is much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blowout here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to main
355. rows Use the navigation arrows to navigate through a menu Enter Press this button to select the choice that is highlighted in any menu L Display Menu Press this button to adjust the brightness screen display mode normal full or zoom and display the language menu Se Return Press this button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button operates only when the display menu or a DVD menu is active E Stop Press this button to stop playing rewinding or fast forwarding a DVD Press this button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD gt Play Pause Press this button to start playing a DVD Press this button while a DVD is playing to pause it Press it again to continue playing the DVD 3 113 When the DVD is playing depending on the radio slow play may be performed by pressing the play pause button then pressing the fast forward button The DVD continues playing in a slow play mode Depending on the radio slow reverse may be performed by pressing the play pause button and then pressing the fast reverse button while a DVD is playing To cancel slow play mode press this button Kd Previous Track Chapter Press this button to return to the start of the current track or chapter Press this button again to go to the previous track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews gt Next Track Chapier
356. rp which may take up to 30 seconds to sound confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position 11 Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 Proceed to the driver side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 5 The horn sounds two times to indicate the sensor identification code has been matched to the driver side rear tire and the TPMS sensor matching process is no longer active The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC display screen goes off Turn the ignition switch to LOCK OFF Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label Put the valve caps back on the valve stems 5 65 Tire Inspection and Rotation We recommend that you regularly inspect your vehicle s tires including the spare tire for signs of wear or damage See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5 67 for more information Tires should be rotated every 5 000 to 8 000 miles 8 000 to 13 000 km See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle This will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new Any time you notice unusual wear rotate the tires as soon as possible and check wheel align
357. rs are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper to Bumper Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada and extended powertrain and hybrid specific warranty in both the U S and Canada Several courtesy transportation options are available to assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty repairs are required Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait However if you are unable to wait GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options Depending on the circumstances your dealer can offer you one of the following Shuttle Service Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering Courtesy Transportation Dealers may provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule This includes one way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters of the dealer s area Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs and public transportation is used instead of the dealer s shuttle service the expense must be supported by original receipts a
358. rsely affect the performance of the system Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more effectively Passenger Compartment Air Filter Outside air is routed through a passenger compartment air filter before entering the vehicle This filter removes certain particles from the air including pollen and dust particles Reductions in airflow which may occur more quickly in dusty areas indicate that the filter needs to be replaced early The filter should be replaced as part of routine scheduled maintenance See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for when to replace the filter To change the passenger compartment air filter use the following steps 1 The passenger s side air inlet panel is located below the center of the passenger s side wiper blade Remove the push pin retaining the air inlet panel Pry the center of the push pin out 0 5 in 13 mm for removal 2 Open the hood 3 Remove the three push pins from the top and forward edge of the passenger s side air inlet panel 4 Remove the air inlet panel to access the filter 3 23 5 Press the release tab on the driver s side of the filter and pull out the edge of the filter ory S 6 Remove the filter from the vehicle 7 Install a new passenger compartment air filter For the type of filter to use see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 15 8 Reverse Steps 1 through 5 3 24
359. runs for about five minutes before turning off again At higher vehicle speeds the defogger may stay on continuously The defogger can also be turned off by turning off the engine For vehicles with the remote start feature the rear defogger will automatically turn on See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 3 22 Notice Do not use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window If you do you could cut or damage the warming grid and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Do not attach a temporary vehicle license tape a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid w Heated Seats For vehicles with heated seats see Heated Seats on page 1 4 Remote Start Climate Control Operation For vehicles with the remote start feature activated the climate control system heats and cools the inside of the vehicle using the modes that were set before the vehicle was turned off The rear defogger will also automatically turn on If the vehicle has heated seats they may turn on if it is cold outside and will shut off when the key is turned to ON RUN See Heated Seats on page 1 4 Outlet Adjustment Use the louvers located on the air outlets to change the direction of the airflow Operation Tips Clear away any ice snow or leaves from the air inlets at the base of the vehicle that may block the flow of air into the vehicle Do not use any non GM approved hood deflectors that could adve
360. s It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment This light should come on when the ignition is on but the engine is not running as a check to show it is working If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer 3 34 If the check engine light comes on and stays on while the engine is running this indicates that there is an OBD II problem and service is required Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent Being aware of the light can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle This system assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction Notice If the vehicle is continually driven with this light on after a while the emission controls might not work as well the vehicle s fuel economy might not be as good and the engine might not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty Notice Modifications made to the engine transmission exhaust intake or fuel system of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria TPC can affect the vehicle s emission controls and can cause this light to come on Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emi
361. s Now and then check that the safety belt reminder light safety belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are all working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job See your dealer retailer to have it repaired Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3 27 for more information Keep safety belts clean and dry See Care of Safety Belts on page 5 91 1 70 Airbags The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement Make sure the airbag readiness light is working See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 28 for more information Notice If an airbag covering is damaged opened or broken the airbag may not work properly Do not open or break the airbag coverings If there are any opened or broken airbag covers have the airbag covering and or airbag module replaced For the location of the airbag modules see What Makes an Airbag Inflate on page 1 61 See your dealer retailer for service Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash A CAUTION A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious inj
362. s 3 118 Theft Deterrent Feature a an 3 117 Automatic Headlamp System eeeeeeeeees 3 14 Automatic Transmission PWG rated chs on T E cantare tate S A 5 21 Operation irere irea E Hi ieselasweved 2 24 2 27 Battery as le ih oieesialwcieeiiad cheidaddeengeeamoniey 5 35 Electric Power Management sacc 3 17 Run Down Protection c eeeeeeeeneeeeeee eens 3 17 Belt Routing Engine c eceeeseceeeeeeeeeeeees 6 16 Bluetooth eisi cein add sl r iniiai ieedit na 3 97 Brake Emergencies arerioen a EAN 4 5 Brake FUG ccctccnsitacnsnetcageactane EN AEE 5 32 Brak S ror sa Lineadedeuestuediaketenuastet 5 32 AIMIIOCK seie teessa encer a nietet aedtaacest ES 4 5 ParKkiING sereine poner itae iaai 2 31 System Warning Light esserne 3 30 Braking eie aan E O 4 4 Braking in Emergencies e eeeeeeeeeeeee seers 4 5 Break In New Vehicle ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 19 Bulb Replacement eceeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 49 Fog Lamp arron 3 15 Halogen Bulbs sad aner seer eder 5 44 Headlamp AiMing 22222 monii oe Er 5 43 Headlamps 22 la cacckese cate saanckestiansanetadenes 5 44 Headlamps Front Turn Signal Sidemarker and Parking Lamps ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 44 License Plate Lamps 2 seeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 48 Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back Up Lamps cece eee e eee eeeee eee eee tees 5 47 Buying New TireS s a oner 5 68 Calibratiom s
363. s airbags A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1 40 In addition the vehicle has a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 63 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3 29 for more information including important safety information A label on the sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys 1 52 A CAUTION A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag A child in a forward facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag no system is fail safe No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off Secure rear facing child restraints in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If you secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passenger seat as far
364. s as little as possible and avoid going above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedometer For information about using tire chains on the vehicle see Tire Chains on page 5 74 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels Turn off any traction or stability system Shift back and forth between R Reverse and a forward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible To prevent transmission wear wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears Release the accelerator pedal while shifting and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries it might need to be towed out If the vehicle does need to be towed out see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 27 Loading the Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry the Tire and Loading Information label and the Vehicle Certification label A CAUTION Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on the vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you
365. s at the same height as the top of the occupant s head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash Pull the head restraint up to raise it To lower the head restraint press the button located on the top of the seatback and push the restraint down Passenger Folding Seatback On vehicles with this feature to fold the seatback 1 Lower the head restraint all the way 2 Lift the bar under the front of the seat to unlock it A CAUTION Slide the seat as far back as it will go and release the bar Try to move the seat back and forth to make sure it is locked into place If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer objects such as skis be sure any such cargo is not near an airbag In a crash an inflating airbag might force that object toward a person This could cause severe injury or even death Secure objects away from the area in which an airbag would inflate For more information see Where Are the Airbags on page 1 58 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 A CAUTION Things you put on this seatback can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn or ina 3 Lift up fully on the recliner lever located on the crash Remove or secure all items before driving outboard side of the seat and fold the seatback forward until it disengages 1 8 4 Continue to fold the seat forward until it locks in the folded position 5 Pull up on the seatback to be sure it is locke
366. s system For vehicles with the remote start feature the climate control system functions as part of the remote start feature See Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation on page 2 5 Fan Control Outside Air Temperature Control Recirculation Air Delivery Mode Control F Air Conditioning G Heated Seats H Rear Window Defogger moop Fan Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed To turn the fan off turn the fan knob all the way counterclockwise In any setting other than off the fan runs continuously with the ignition on The fan must be turned on to run the air conditioning compressor There will be some airflow noticeable from the various outlets when driving even with the fan in the off position This is so fresh air is always available in the vehicle To turn off the air completely turn the fan to O and select the recirculation button Temperature Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle Air Delivery Mode Control Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow inside the vehicle There is one position between each mode to finely adjust airflow position Select from the following modes pe Vent Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets Wi Bi Level Air is divided between the instrument panel outlets and the floor outlets 3 19 ted Floor
367. s used with plain water 5 89 If any of the soil remains a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used test a small hidden area for colorfastness first If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result clean the entire surface After the cleaning process has been completed a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet Leather A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used Allow the leather to dry naturally Do not use heat to dry Never use steam to clean leather Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of the leather and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based products or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss ina non uniform manner Never use shoe polish on leather 5 90 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and
368. safety belt The safety belt can not properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A safety belt must be used by only one person at a time A CAUTION Never do this Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap shoulder belt properly In a crash the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury The child might also slide under the lap belt The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen That could cause serious or fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest 1 33 Infants and Young Children system is designed for them Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes protection provided by appropriate child restraints infants and all other children Neither the distance Children who are not restrained properly can strike other traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes people or can be thrown out of the vehicle the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must gt be restrained while in a vehicle A CAUTION A CAUTI
369. sage is on but there is no reduction in performance proceed to your destination The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven The vehicle may be driven ata reduced speed while this message is on but acceleration and speed may be reduced Anytime this message stays on the vehicle should be taken to your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible 3 51 FUEL LEVEL LOW This message displays and the Low Fuel Warning Light in the instrument panel cluster comes on when your vehicle is low on fuel Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible See Fuel Gage on page 3 40 Low Fuel Warning Light on page 3 41 and Filling the Tank on page 5 8 for more information HOOD OPEN This message displays on some vehicles when the hood is not closed properly Close the hood completely See Hood Release on page 5 11 ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE This message displays when the outside air temperature is cold enough to create icy road conditions Adjust your driving accordingly LIFTGATE OPEN This message displays when the liftgate is not closed completely Close the liftgate completely See Liftgate on page 2 12 3 52 OIL PRSSURE Pressure LOW STOP ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low severe engine damage may occur If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not drive the vehicle until the cause
370. seconds the system will re arm itself automatically To disarm the theft deterrent system do one of the following 1 Unlock the doors with the RKE transmitter 2 Insert the key in the ignition and turn it from the LOCK OFF position PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer The PASS Key Ill system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interference 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment PASS Key Ill uses a radio frequency transponder in the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation Your vehicle has PASS Key Ill Personalized Automotive Security System theft deterrent system PASS Key Ill is a passive theft deterrent system The system is automatically armed when the
371. should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to d
372. sistance Program on page 7 7 If you do decide to lift the hood make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running If the engine is overheating both fans should be running If they are not do not continue to run the engine and have the vehicle serviced Notice Engine damage from running the engine without coolant is not covered by the warranty Notice If the engine catches fire while driving with no coolant the vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 30 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency If Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment A CAUTION Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop the engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5 30 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency If No Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment If
373. sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with roof rail airbags A CAUTION Children who are up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Airbags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehicle To read how see Older Children on page 1 31 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 34 There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 28 for more information 1 57 Where Are the Airbags The right front passenger s airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side The driver s airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel 1 58 alike ra Driver Side shown Passenger Side similar If your vehicle has roof rail airbags for the driver right front passenger and second row outboard passengers they are in the ceiling above the side windows
374. sons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spinal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking Control of a Vehicle The following three systems help to control the vehicle while driving brakes steering and accelerator At times as when driving on snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide Meaning you can lose control of the vehicle See Traction Control System TCS on page 4 7 Adding non dealer non retailer accessories can affect vehicle performance See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 Braking See Brake System Warning Light on page 3 30 Braking action involves perception time and reaction time Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time Actually doing it is reaction time Average reaction time is about three fourths of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs an
375. soon as possible The spare tire will last longer and be in good shape in case it is needed again Notice When the compact spare is installed do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails The compact spare can get caught on the rails which can damage the tire wheel and other parts of the vehicle Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires They will not fit Keep the spare tire and its wheel together Notice Tire chains will not fit the compact spare Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage the chains too Do not use tire chains on the compact spare 5 87 Appearance Care Interior Cleaning The vehicle s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often Although not always visible dust and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery Dirt can damage carpet fabric leather and plastic surfaces Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the upholstery It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled Soils should be removed as quickly as possible The vehicle s interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer color to the vehicle s interior When cleaning t
376. spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria TPC standards Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor labora
377. ssion Inspection Maintenance test See Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 This light comes on during a malfunction in one of two ways Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on the vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle e Reduce vehicle speed Avoid hard accelerations Avoid steep uphill grades e If towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park the vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light is still flashing follow the previous steps and see your dealer retailer for service as soon as possible Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on the vehicle Diagnosis and service might be required An emission system malfunction might be corrected by doing the following Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed See Filling the Tank on page 5 8 The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off Ifthe vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle
378. st be in good condition and properly inflated It is the owner s responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty Battery Jump Start Service is provided to jump start a dead battery Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years 100 000 miles 160 000 km Powertrain warranty period Items considered are hotel meals and rental car Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance Impound towing caused by violation of any laws Legal fines Mounting dismounting or changing of snow tires chains or other traction devices Towing or services for vehicles driven on a non public road or highway Services Specific to Canadian Purchased Vehicles Fuel delivery Reimbursement is approximately 5 Canadian Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service Lock Out Service Vehicle registration is required Trip Routing Service Detailed maps of North America are provided when requested either with the most direct route or the most scenic route There is a limit of six requests per year Additional travel information is also available Allow three weeks for delivery Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance Must be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was started to qualify General Motors of Canada Limited requires
379. stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD R or CD RW starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play the track number and song title displays 4 cp Eject Press and release this button to eject the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing in the bottom slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD R or CD RW can be removed If the CD R or CD RW is not removed after several seconds the CD R or CD RW automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold this button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject ZA DVD Eject Press and release to eject the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing in the top slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD R or CD RW can be removed If the CD R or CD RW is not removed after several seconds the CD R or CD RW automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold this button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject dd Tune Turn to select MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW currently playing 3 93 K SEEK D Press the left SEEK arrow to go
380. strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating This way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety during normal use as the original tires GM s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle including brake system performance ride and handling traction control and tire pressure monitoring performance GM s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire s sidewall near the tire size If the tires have an all season tread design the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5 52 for additional information GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires were new Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the braking and handling performance of your vehicle See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 66 for information on proper tire rotation A CAUTION Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes brands or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes brands or types may also cause damage to your vehicle Be sure to use the correct size brand and t
381. such as the radio and air conditioner 3 30 Brake System Warning Light Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part is not working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the brake system warning light comes on there is a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away Qe O United States Canada The brake light is located in the instrument panel cluster This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON RUN If it does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem When the ignition is on the brake light will come on when you set your parking brake The light will stay on if your parking brake does not release fully A chime will also sound if the parking brake is not fully released and the vehicle is moving If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released it means you have a brake problem The brake light will also come on to indicate a low brake fluid level See Brakes on page 5 32 for more information If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4 27 A CAUTION The brake system mi
382. sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard See nflation Tire Pressure on page 5 58 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The
383. sure to align the notches in the bulb with the notches in the headlamp assembly 8 Place the retaining ring over the bulb socket and turn it clockwise to tighten it and secure the bulb socket 9 Connect the electrical connector 10 Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall the headlamp assembly Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back up Lamps A Turn Signal Lamp Taillamp B Stoplamp Taillamp C Sidemarker Lamp D Back Up Lamp To replace one of these bulbs 1 Open the liftgate See Liftgate on page 2 12 2 Remove the taillamp screw covers and then remove the two screws Carefully slide the taillamp assembly outward to clear the stud see arrow and then straight back and away from the body of the vehicle 4 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it License Plate Lamp from the taillamp assembly 5 Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket To replace one of these bulbs 6 Push the new bulb straight into the bulb socket 1 Remove the two screws holding each of the license i i plate lamps to the liftgate handle 7 Push the bulb socket into the taillamp housing and turn it clockwise to secure 8 Carefully push the taillamp assembly back into the body of the vehicle and then carefully slide the taillamp assembly inward to reengage the stud 9 Reinstall the two screws that hold the taillamp assembly in the body of the vehicle 10 Reinstall the two taillamp scre
384. system is not functioning the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and vehicle speed While in a curve speed is the one factor that can be controlled If there is a need to reduce speed do it before entering the curve while the front wheels are straight Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you These problems can be avoided by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply the brakes See Braking on page 4 4 It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available An emergency like this requires close atte
385. t or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not make full throttle starts Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings Do not tow a trailer during break in See Towing a Trailer on page 4 34 for the trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle and more information Following break in engine speed and load can be gradually increased Ignition Positions The ignition switch has four different positions In order to shift out of P Park ignition must be in the ON RUN or ACC ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal must be applied 2 20 Notice Using a tool to force the key to turn in the ignition could cause damage to the switch or break the key Use the correct key make sure it is all the way in and turn it only with your hand If the key cannot be turned by hand see your dealer retailer O LOCK OFF This position locks the ignition and steering column with the key removed You will only be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned to LOCK OFF The ignition switch cannot be turned to LOCK OFF unless the shift lever is in P Park The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center If this happens move the steering wh
386. t unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor disconnect it Airbag System Your vehicle has the following airbags A frontal airbag for the driver A frontal airbag for the right front passenger Your vehicle may have the following airbags A roof rail airbag for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver Aroof rail airbag for the right front passenger and the passenger seated directly behind that passenger All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening For frontal airbags the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the right front passenger With roof rail airbags the word AIRBAG will appear along the headliner or trim 1 55 Even if you do not have a right front passenger seat in your vehicle there is still an active frontal airbag in the right side of the instrument panel Do not place cargo in front of this airbag A CAUTION Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag In a crash an inflating airbag might force that object toward a person This could cause severe injury or even death Secure objects away from the area in which an airbag would inflate For more information see Where Are the Airbags on page 1 58 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4
387. t carrying hitch or a weight distributing hitch is being used the trailer tongue A should weigh 10 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight B After loading the trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they are not adjustments might be made by moving some items around in the trailer Total Weight on the Vehicle s Tires Be sure the vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires These numbers can be found on the Certification label or see Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 for more information Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle or the GAWR including the weight of the trailer tongue Hitches It is important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended for hitches Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper type hitches to it Use only a frame mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper e Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle when the trailer hitch is installed If so be sure to seal the holes when the hitch is removed If they are not sealed deadly carbon monoxide CO from the engine s exhaust can get into the vehicle See Engine Exhaust on page 2 35 Sealing the holes will also prevent dirt and water from entering the vehicle Safety Chains Always attach chains
388. t inflation pressure for your vehicle s tires when they are cold See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle Also see Inflation Tire Pressure on page 5 58 Your vehicle s TPMS can warn you about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5 66 and Tires on page 5 51 Notice Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS sensors Sensor damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered by your warranty Do not use liquid tire sealants TPMS Malfunction Light and Message The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable When the system detects a malfunction the low tire warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle A DIC warning message is also displayed The low tire warning light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected Some of the conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come on are One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off once you re install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor The TPMS sensor matching process was started but not compl
389. t the air conditioning is on The air conditioning can be selected in any mode as long as the fan is on and the outside temperature is above freezing A flashing indicator light indicates that the air conditioning compressor is currently not available On hot days open the windows to let hot inside air escape then close them This helps to reduce the time it takes for the vehicle to cool down It also helps the system to operate more efficiently For quick cool down on hot days select the following settings together i Select 74 mode 2 Select Q 3 Turn the on 4 Select the coolest temperature and highest fan speed 5 Once the vehicle s interior temperature is below the outside temperature select recirculation mode for enhanced cooling Using these settings together for long periods of time may cause the air inside of the vehicle to become too dry To prevent this from happening after the air inside of the vehicle has cooled turn the recirculation mode off The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air SO a small amount of water might drip under the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine Outside Air Press to turn the outside air mode on An indicator light comes on to show that outside air is on Air from outside the vehicle will circulate throughout the vehicle The outside air mode can be used with all modes but it cannot be used with the recirculation mode Pressing c amp
390. t types of music The choices are pop rock country talk jazz and classical Selecting MANUAL or changing bass or treble returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source If the radio has a Bose audio system the EQ settings are either MANUAL or TALK Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade Base Radio with CD dg BAL FADE Balance Fade To adjust the balance or fade press the I button or the Jd knob until the desired speaker control tab displays Turn the s knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the setting 3 71 Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL FADE Balance Fade To adjust balance or fade press the JJ knob until the speaker control tabs display Continue pressing to highlight the desired tab or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired tab Turn the Jd knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing the SEEK arrows bb FWD or ST REV button until the desired levels are obtained To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE tab for more than two seconds A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the middle position press the d knob for more than two seconds until a beep sounds 3 72 Finding a Category CAT Station
391. tain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road if possible A CAUTION Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training If a jack is provided with the vehicle it is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack If a jack is provided with the vehicle only use it for changing a flat tire If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use the jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely 5 75 Changing a Flat Tire 7 CAUTION Continued If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on the hazard Turn off the engine and do not restart while warning flashers See Hazard Warning Flashers ihe Vehicle ie raised on page 3 6 ACAUTION Changing a tire can be dangerous The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people You and they could be badly injured
392. tal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually Roof rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body Rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first and second rows The rollover capable roof rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events although no system can prevent all such ejections But airbags would not help in many types of collisions primarily because the occupant s motion is not toward those airbags See When Should an Airbag Inflate on page 1 60 for more information Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts 1 61 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates After the frontal airbags inflate they quickly deflate so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated Roof rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes For locat
393. tery or trim or with GM covers upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle Any object such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device installed under or on top of the seat fabric could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag s or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag s See Passenger Sensing System on page 1 63 If you have any questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 2 If the vehicle has rollover roof rail airbags see Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5 70 for additional important information Q Because have a disability have to get my vehicle modified How can find out whether this will affect my airbag system If you have questions call Customer Assistance The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7 2 In addition your dealer retailer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag sensors sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring 1 69 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Safety Belt
394. th the random setting CD tracks can be listened to in random rather than sequential order To use random do the following 1 Press to play tracks from the CD in random order The random icon displays 2 Press again to turn off random play The random icon disappears from the display RDM Random With the random setting tracks can be listened to in random rather than sequential order on one CD or all CDs in a six disc CD player To use random do one of the following Press the CD AUX button or for a single CD player insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD player A RDM tab displays To play the tracks from the single CD in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play Press the CD AUX button or for a six disc CD player press and hold the button A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays Insert one or more discs partway into the slot of the CD player To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six disc CD player in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM tab until Randomize All Discs displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play 3 76 RPT Repeat Base Radio with CD With the repeat setting one track can be repeated To repeat the current track press and release the RPT button An arrow symbol displays Press again to turn off repeat play When repeat is
395. ther anchor if equipped Refer to the child restraint instructions and the A Passenger s Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors B Center Rear Seat Lower Anchors following steps C Drivers Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors 2 1 Find the top tether anchor Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper 2 2 You may need to adjust the rear compartment anchor location storage panel cover in the rear cargo area to access the anchors See Rear Compartment This system is designed to make installation of child Storage Panel Cover on page 2 45 restraints easier When using lower anchors do not use the vehicle s safety belts Instead use the vehicle s 1 47 If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you 2 3 Route attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether route the tether over the seatback If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether over the seatback are using a dual tether route the tether around the headrest or head restraint If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether raise the headrest or head restraint and route the tether under the headrest or hea
396. there is enough room around the vehicle 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake See Parking Brake on page 2 31 Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The vehicle should start only in P Park or N Neutral If the vehicle starts in any other position contact your dealer retailer for service Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check A CAUTION When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before starting this check be sure there is enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a level surface 2 Firmly apply the parking brake See Parking Brake on page 2 31 Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move 3 With the engine off turn the ignition to ON RUN but do not start the engine Without applying the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of P Park with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of P Park contact your dealer retailer for service Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition to LOCK OFF in each shift lever position The ignition should turn to LOCK OFF only when the shift lever is in P Park The ignition key should come out only in LOCK OFF Contact your
397. this inspection if the OBD II on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if the battery has recently been replaced or if the battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving This can take several days of routine driving If this has been done and the vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness your dealer retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection 3 36 Oil Pressure Light US Canada A CAUTION Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low The engine can become so hot that it catches fire Someone could be burned Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced Notice Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil This light comes on briefly while starting the engine If it does not have the vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off If the light comes on and stays on it means that oil is not flowing through the engine properly The vehicle could be low on oil and it might have some other system problem Change En
398. tick with a clean rag 4 Replace the cap and completely tighten it 5 Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The fluid level should be between the Min Minimum and Max Maximum marks when the engine is cold and at the Max mark when the engine is hot If the fluid is at the Min mark when the engine is cold or hot power steering fluid should be added What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Always use the proper fluid Notice Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle s warranty Always use the correct fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6 13 Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield or rear window washer fluid be sure to read the instructions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing 5 31 Adding Windshield Washer Fluid Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for reservoir location Notice When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Do not mix water with ready to use washer fluid Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer f
399. tion exists an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage In this mode there is a significant loss in power and engine performance The temperature gage indicates an overheat condition exists Driving extended distances and or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided 5 30 Notice After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode to avoid engine damage allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair The engine oil will be severely degraded Repair the cause of coolant loss change the oil and reset the oil life system See Engine Oil on page 5 15 Power Steering Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5 12 for reservoir location AAAA AR When to Check Power Steering Fluid Power steering fluid is used in all vehicles with the 3 6L V6 engine Vehicles with the 3 4L V6 engine have electric power steering and do not use power steering fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid do the following 1 Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down 2 Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean 3 Unscrew the cap and wipe the dips
400. titute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle s engine see Engine Oil on page 5 15 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable Engine Oil water and use only DEX COOL Coolant See Engine Coolant on page 5 23 DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid Hydraulic Brake GM Part No U S 12377967 y in Canada 89021320 Engine Coolant Fluid Lubricant ee Optikleen Washer Solvent Hydraulic GM Power Steerin i g Fluid tat GM Part No U S 89021184 y in Canada 89021186 V6 engine only Use only T IV Automatic Transmission Fluid GM Part No U S 88900925 in Canada 22689186 See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5 21 5 speed Automatic Transmission 3 4L V6 engine only 6 speed Automatic i Transmission DEXRON VI Automatic Transmission Fluid engine only Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Key Lock GM Part No U S 12346241 y in Canada 10953474 Carrier Assembly Differential Rear Drive Module Axle Lubricant GM Part No U S 89021677 in Canada 89021678 Usage Fluid Lubricant With 3 4L V6 engine VERSATRAK Fluid GM Part No U S 12378514 in Canada 88901045 With 3 6L V6 engine SAE 75W 90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant GM Part No U S 89021677 in Canada 89021678 meeting GM Specification 9986115 Transfer Case Power Transfer Unit Hood Latch Assembly Secondary Latch Pivots Lubriplate Lubr
401. to the start of the current MP3 WMA file if more than five seconds have played If less than five seconds have played the previous MP3 WMA file plays Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3 WMaA file If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through the MP3 WMA files on the CD st Previous Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder tab to go to the first track in the previous folder gt Next Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder tab to go to the first track in the next folder lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 WMA file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays bb FWD Fast Forward Press and hold to advance playback quickly within an MP3 WMA file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays 3 94 RDM Random With the random setting MP3 WMA files on the CD R or CD RW can be played in random rather than sequential order To listen to MP3 WMA files from the CD R or CD RW that is currently playing in random order press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM tab until Random Current Disc displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play Q Music Navigator Use the music navigator featu
402. to do to avoid or reduce the hazard Read these cautions A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle Notice These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle Many times this damage would not be covered by the vehicle s warranty and it could be costly The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use the same words CAUTION or Notice Vehicle Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gage or indicator CA This symbol is shown when you need to see your owner manual for additional instructions or information This symbol is shown when you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or information Vehicle Symbol Chart B Fuel Gage Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean For more information on the symbol refer to the index 4 Fuses D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer r a Airbag Readiness Light LATCH System Child Restraints oe A Gonainanag Ko Malfunction Indicator Lamp Antilock Brake System ABS Y Oil Pressure Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar Power Brake System Warning Light Q Remote Vehicle Start i m Charging System A Safety Belt Remin
403. tored by pressing the pushbutton under the Add tab when a removed category displays or by pressing the pushbutton under the Restore All tab Categories cannot be added or removed while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph 8 km h Radio Messages Calibration Error The audio system has been calibrated for the vehicle from the factory If Calibration Error displays it means that the radio has not been configured properly for the vehicle and it must be returned to your dealer retailer for service Loc or Locked This message displays when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up the radio Take the vehicle to your dealer retailer for service If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer retailer XM Satellite Radio Service XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial free music coast to coast and in digital quality sound During your trial or when you subscribe you will get unlimited access to XM Radio Online for when you are not in the vehicle A service fee is required to receive the XM service For more information contact XM at xmradio com or call 1 800 929 2100 in the U S and xmradio ca or call 1 877 438 9677 in Canada 3 73 Radio Messages for XM Only See XM Radio Messages on page 3 96 later in this section for further detail Playing
404. tory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law It should be noted that the temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure 5 72 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other the alignment might need to be checked If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced See your dealer retailer for proper diagnosis Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be
405. ts braking ride and handling characteristics stability and resistance to rollover Additionally if your vehicle has electronic systems such as anti lock brakes rollover airbags traction control and electronic stability control the performance of these systems can be affected 5 70 A CAUTION If you add different sized wheels your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serious injury Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for your vehicle and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician See Buying New Tires on page 5 68 and Accessories and Modifications on page 5 3 for additional information Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature performance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use
406. tter than the normal operating temperature To avoid added strain on a hot engine the air conditioning compressor is automatically turned off When the coolant temperature returns to normal the A C operation automatically resumes You can continue to drive your vehicle ENGINE OVERHEATD Overheated IDLE ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not increase the engine speed above normal idling speed See Engine Overheating on page 5 28 for more information This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down ENGINE OVRHEATD Overheated STOP ENGINE Notice If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible See Engine Overheating on page 5 28 for more information This message displays along with a continuous chime when the engine has overheated Stop and turn the engine off immediately to avoid severe engine damage See Engine Overheating on page 5 28 ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED This message displays when the vehicle s engine power is reduced Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle s ability to accelerate If this mes
407. ty belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety forward in a sudden stop or crash That could belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return cause injury to the person sitting there Always them to their normal stowed position before folding push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they a rear seat are locked 1 Ensure all three of the safety belts are unbuckled and the front seatbacks are not reclined 2 Lift the lever located on the top of the seatback to release the seatback 3 Fold the seatback forward to the desired position To recline the seatback do the following 1 Lift and hold the lever located on top of the seatback 2 Tilt the seatback rearward then release the lever when the seatback is in the desired position To slide the entire seat forward or rearward do the following 1 Lift and hold the release bar located under the front of the seat cushion to unlock the seat 2 Slide the seat to the desired position 3 Release the bar 4 Try to move the seat back and forth to ensure the seat is locked in place Safety Belts Safety Belts They Are for Everyone This section of the manual describes how to use safety belts properly It also describes some things not to do with safety belts A CAUTION Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn properly In a crash if you or your passenger s are not wearing safety belts the injuries can be much worse Y
408. uired to steer the vehicle increases or feels heavier but you will still be able to steer the vehicle Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer retailer immediately SERVICE STABILITRAK This message displays if there has been a problem detected with the StabiliTrak System A warning light also appears on the instrument panel cluster See Traction Control System TCS Warning Light on page 3 32 See StabiliTrak System on page 4 6 for more information If this message turns on while you are driving pull off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and then back on If this message still stays on or turns back on again while you are driving your vehicle needs service Have the StabiliTrak System inspected by your dealer retailer as soon as possible 3 54 SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM This message displays when there is a problem with the theft deterrent system A fault has been detected in the system which means that the system is disabled and it is not protecting the vehicle The vehicle usually restarts however you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer retailer before turning off the engine See PASS Key Ill Electronic Immobilizer Operation on page 2 18 for more information SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS is not working properly The tire pressure light also flashes and then
409. ury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible If the vehicle has been in a crash do you need new safety belts or LATCH system if equipped parts After a very minor crash nothing may be necessary But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged See your dealer retailer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected or replaced If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash you may need new LATCH system parts New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt or LATCH system if equipped was not being used at the time of the crash If an airbag inflates you will need to replace airbag system parts See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash if the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or while you are driving See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3 28 1 71 4 NOTES 1 72 Section 2 Features and Controls KEYS cnnan ea AE renere 2 3 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System 2 4 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation esse eee eee eeaeeaeeaeeaeeaeeaeees 2 5 Remote Vehicle Start cceceeeneeeeeeeeeenes 2 7 Doors and LOCKS i ccsisciice sensi cna
410. used in this position when a flat or spare tire has to be placed in the rear cargo area To use the panel in the upper position do the following 1 Insert the front corners of the panel into the top guides 2 Slide the panel forward 3 Press down and pull rearward on the back of the panel to lock it in place This can be used as a cargo cover for the rear area The panel may be installed either carpet or plastic side up The panel may also be used as a table in this position See Table on page 2 47 for more information Rear Seat Armrest Vehicles with a rear seat armrest have two cupholders Pull the armrest down from the rear seatback to access the cupholders For vehicles with an adjustable panel cargo cover it can function as a table The maximum load for the table is 100 Ibs distributed 45 kg 2 47 To set up the table do the following 1 With the adjustable panel in the upper position pull rearward to position it for use as a table The plastic side should be up 2 Turn the knob to release the leg from the plastic side of the table and turn the leg outward 3 Set the table leg onto the liftgate lock striker at the rear edge of the vehicle Make sure to place the table leg securely onto the liftgate lock striker Notice Driving with the panel extended into the table position could damage your vehicle Always have the panel in the stored position while you are driving 2 48 Notice Placi
411. vcnec ries Bb rr EA Ban teen 5 91 Washing Your Vehicle a se 5 91 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses eeseeeeen 5 92 Finish Cane Aadal cis kee eSa 5 92 Windshield and Wiper Blades 0 5 93 Aluminum or Chrome Plated Wheels and Trim 5 94 e nidenecatimiecussne niaich sineaiasaetuctans e 5 94 Sheet Metal Damage eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee reas 5 95 Finish Damage sine aa 5 95 Underbody Maintenance sssseseseesesrneree 5 95 Chemical Paint Spotting eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 95 Vehicle Identification 0 ee 5 96 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 5 96 Service Parts Identification Label 00 5 96 Electrical System 2 eee 5 96 Add On Electrical Equipment eeeeees 5 96 Windshield Wiper Fuses eeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 97 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ceeseeeeee ees 5 97 Instrument Panel Fuse Block scce 5 97 Engine Compartment Fuse Block 006 5 99 Capacities and Specifications 5 103 Service For service and parts needs visit your dealer retailer You will receive genuine GM parts and GM trained and supported service people Genuine GM parts have one of these marks ACDelco ig Parts EF Goodwrench ME Accessories Accessories and Modifications When non dealer non retailer accessories are added to the vehicle they can affect vehicle performance
412. vehicle from approximately 195 feet 60 m away See your dealer retailer if you would like to add the manufacturer s remote vehicle start feature to your vehicle Doors and Locks Door Locks A CAUTION Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked So all passengers should wear safety belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening To lock or unlock a door use the key from the outside or the door lock from the inside Power Door Locks The power door lock switches are located on the driver s and front passenger s doors A Unlock To unlock the doors press the unlock symbol o Lock Remove the key and press the lock symbol to lock all of the doors Delayed Locking A chime will sound three times to indicate a door or liftgate is open when you try to lock the doors with the pow
413. ven calls Sending a Number During a Call 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone Say Dial The system responds with Say a number to send tones followed by a tone Say the number to send If the system clearly recognizes the number it responds with OK Sending Number and the dial tones are sent and the call continues If the system is not sure it recognized the number properly it responds Dial Number Please say yes or no followed by a tone If the number is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Sending Number and the dial tones are sent and the call continues Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call 1 Press The system responds with Ready followed by a tone 2 Say Send name tag The system responds with Say aname tag to send tones followed by a tone 3 Say the name tag to send e If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with OK Sending lt name tag gt and the dial tones are sent and the call continues If the system is not sure it recognized the name tag properly it responds Dial lt name tag gt Please say yes or no followed by a tone If the name tag is correct say Yes The system responds with OK Sending lt name tag gt and the dial tones are sent and the call continues Clearing the System Unless information is deleted out of the in vehicl
414. ving Turn Signal Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following Turn and Lane Change Signals 2D D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Exterior Lamp Control Flash to Pass Information for these features is on the pages following Turn and Lane Change Signals An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically Raise or lower the lever until the indicator arrow on the instrument panel starts to flash to signal a lane change Hold it there until the lane change is completed The lever will return by itself when it is released As you signal a turn or a lane change if the arrows flash rapidly a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers will not see your turn signal If a bulb is burned out replace it to help avoid an accident If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal a turn check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5 97 and for burned out bulbs Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low beam to high push the turn signal lever away from you To change from high beam to low beam pull the turn signal lever towards you To flash the high beams from low beam pull the turn signal lever all the way towards you Then release it When the high beams
415. w covers 2 Turn and pull the license plate lamp down through the liftgate opening 3 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the bulb straight out of the socket 4 Push the new bulb in and turn clockwise to lock into place 5 48 5 Push and turn the license plate lamp up through the liftgate opening 6 Reinstall the two screws holding the license plate lamp to the liftgate handle Replacement Bulbs For replacement bulbs not listed here contact your dealer retailer Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear and cracking See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6 4 for more information Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways For proper type and length see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6 15 To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly 2 Push the release lever B to disengage the hook 3 5 50 and push the wiper arm A out of the blade C Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm until you hear the release lever click into place To replace the rear window wiper blade 1 2 w Lift the wiper blade arm straight toward you Push the blade release button and slide the whole blade to the right to remove Install the new blade Push the wiper blade arm back into place Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ev
416. way snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust Run the engine for short periods only as needed to keep warm but be careful To save fuel run the engine for only short periods as needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and close the window most of the way to save heat Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold Moving about to keep warm also helps If it takes some time for help to arrive now and then when you run the engine push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps Do this as little as possible to save fuel If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand mud ice or snow See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4 21 If the vehicle has a traction system it can often help to free a stuck vehicle Refer to the vehicle s traction system in the Index If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the vehicle turn the traction system off and use the rocking method 4 20 A CAUTION If you let your vehicle s tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured The vehicle can overheat causing an engine compartment fire or other damage Spin the wheel
417. wear sunglasses Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Keep your eyes moving especially during turns or curves No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differences increase A 50 year old driver might need at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old 4 14 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep standing or flowing water A CAUTION Wet brakes can cause crashes They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the vehicle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car vehicle wash lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces Driving through flowing water could cause your vehicle to be carried away If this happens you and other vehicle occupants could drown Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous Water can build up under your vehicle s tires so they actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
418. while you need to reset the warning message To reset the warning message turn the ignition off and then back on again If the message stays on see your dealer retailer right away See All Wheel Drive AWD System on page 4 9 and All Whee Drive Disabled Light on page 3 39 for more information BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE This message displays when the charging system detects that the battery is being drained You may notice that the vehicle attempts to reduce the drain for you by turning off accessories such as interior fans rear defogger and heated seats Turn off all accessories If the vehicle is not running start and run the engine for at least 10 minutes to allow the battery to recharge If the engine is running and the condition persists see your dealer retailer See Electric Power Management on page 3 17 for more information 3 49 CALIBRATING DRIVE IN CIRCLES This message displays when calibrating the compass Drive the vehicle in circles at less than 5 mph 8 km h to complete the calibration See DIC Compass on page 3 47 for more information CALIBRATION COMPLETE This message displays when the compass calibration is complete See DIC Compass on page 3 47 for more information CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This message displays and the Change Engine Oil Light in the instrument panel cluster turns on when service is required for the vehicle See your dealer retailer See Change Engine Oil Light on page 3 37 Engine
419. witches to turn the feature on and off The switch has a light that comes on when the switch is active Sun Visors To block out glare swing the sun visor down You can also detach the driver s sun visor from the center mount and slide it along the rod from side to side for greater coverage Visor Vanity Mirrors Your vehicle has covered visor vanity mirrors on both the driver s and passenger s side Theft Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business especially in some cities This vehicle has theft deterrent features however they do not make it impossible to steal Content Theft Deterrent Your vehicle has a content theft deterrent alarm system To activate the theft deterrent system 1 Open the door 2 Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter If you are using the RKE transmitter the door does not need to be open 3 Close all doors The key must be removed from the ignition to arm the system If the theft deterrent system is activated and a door or the liftgate is opened without using the RKE transmitter a 10 second pre alarm will occur and the security light will flash The horn will sound rapidly for 10 seconds If you do not press unlock on the RKE transmitter or insert the key in the ignition and turn if from the LOCK OFF position the alarm will go off The horn will sound and the headlamps will flash for 30 seconds After the alarm has sounded for 30
420. wnercenter com chevrolet Information and services customized for your specific vehicle all in one convenient place Digital owner manual warranty information and more Online service and maintenance records Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide Exclusive privileges and offers e Recall notices for your specific vehicle OnStar and GM Cardmember Services Earnings summaries Other Helpful Links Chevrolet www chevrolet com Chevrolet Merchandise www chevymall com Help Center www chevrolet com helpcenter FAQ Contact Us My GM Canada Canada www gm ca My GM Canada is a password protected section of www gm ca where you can save information on GM vehicles get personalized offers and use handy tools and forms with greater ease Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to My Showroom Find and save information on vehicles and current offers in your area My Dealers Retailers Save details such as address and phone number for each of your preferred GM dealers retailers My Driveway Access quick links to parts and service estimates check trade in values or schedule a service appointment by adding the vehicles you own to your driveway profile My Preferences Manage your profile and use tools and forms with greater ease To sign up visit the My GM Canada section within www gm ca Customer Assistance for Text Telephone TTY Users To
421. xample 2 Subtract Occupant Weight 150 Ibs 68 kg x 5 Available Cargo 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg 250 Ibs 113 kg Refer to your vehicle s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle s maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating positions The combined weight of the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle s maximum vehicle capacity weight Example 3 Item Description Maximum Vehicle A Capacity Weight for aa Example 3 g Subtract Occupant Weight 200 Ibs Taea 91 kg x 5 g Available Cargo abs 0 ka 4 25 Certification Label GAWR FRT GAWR RR A vehicle specific Certification Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver s door or on the vehicle s center pillar B pillar The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo 4 26 The Certification Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline N
422. xcellent driver but if you are in a crash even one that is not your fault you and your passenger s can be hurt Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This section is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and infants If a child will be riding in the vehicle see Older Children on page 1 31 or Infants and Young Children on page 1 34 Follow those rules for everyone s protection It is very important for all occupants to buckle up Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts First before you or your passenger s wear a safety belt there is important information you should know WO Ss 4 Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to
423. y At the same time the radio displays a softkey menu of option s Some discs automatically play the movie while others default to the softkey menu display which requires the Play Enter or Navigation softkeys to be pressed either by softkey or by the rear seat passenger using the remote control Loading a disc into the system depending on media type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD and up to 30 seconds for a DVD 3 83 Stopping and Resuming Playback To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system press the Il button on the remote control or press the pushbutton located under the stop or the play pause symbol tags displayed on the radio If the radio head is sourced to something other than DVD V press the DVD CD AUX button to make DVD V the active source To resume DVD playback press the play pause button on the remote control or press the pushbutton located under the play pause symbol tag displayed on the radio The DVD should resume play from where it last stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote control If the disc has been ejected or the stop button has been pressed twice on the remote control the disc resumes playing at the beginning of the disc 3 84 Ejecting a Disc Press the ZA button on the radio to eject the disc If a disc is ejected from the radio but not removed the radio reloads the disc after a short period of time Th
424. y shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the area immediately Notice If you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer retailer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions system See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3 34 Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood A CAUTION A CAUTION Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor You can be badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others Dispense fuel only into approved containers Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle in a vehicle s trunk pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside A CAUTION of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the filling Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and is complete start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil Do not smoke while pumping fuel coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other Do not use a cellular phone while fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could pumping fuel be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engi
425. y you can use a s cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5 76 5 67 You need new tires if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage The rubber in tires degrades over time even if they are not being used This is also true for the spare tire if your vehicle has one Multiple conditions affect how fast this aging takes place including temperatures loading conditions and inflation pressure maintenance With proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out before they degrade due to age If you are unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get older consult the tire manufacturer for more information 5 68 Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle when it was new were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC Spec system rating If you need replacement tires GM
426. y CALIBRATING DRIVE IN CIRCLES Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less than 5 mph 8 km h to complete the calibration The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a few seconds when the calibration is complete The DIC display will then return to the previous menu DIC Warnings and Messages Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed by the driver to correct the condition Multiple messages may appear one after another Some messages may not require immediate action but you can press the set reset button to acknowledge that you received the messages and to clear them from the display Pressing any of the DIC buttons also acknowledge and clear any messages Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display because they are more urgent These messages require action before they can be cleared You should take any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear not correct the problem The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF If your vehicle has the All Wheel Drive AWD system this message displays along with the All Wheel Drive Disabled light when the rear drive system is overheating This message turns off when the rear drive system cools down If the warning message stays on for a
427. y pressing the display menu button on the remote control Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the remote control and the transmitter window Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or installed incorrectly If the stop button was pressed one time the DVD player resumes playing where the DVD was stopped If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player begins to play from the beginning of the DVD 3 115 Recommended Action Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary source mode Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Sometimes the wireless Check for obstructions headphone audio cuts out low batteries reception or buzzes range and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using a cellular telephone in the vehicle Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L left and R right on the headphones lost the remote and or See your dealer retailer the headphones for assistance The DVD is playing but Check that the RSE video there is no picture or screen is sourced to the sound DVD player The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or sound 3 116 DVD Display Error Messages The DVD display error message depends on which radio the vehicle has The video screen can display one of the following Disc Load Eject Error This message displays w
428. y sealed If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle Drive it only with the windows completely down Have the vehicle repaired immediately Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation 2 35 Running the Vehicle While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running But if you ever have to here are some things to know A CAUTION Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide CO which cannot be seen or smelled It can cause unconsciousness and even death Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation For more information see Engine Exhaust on page 2 35 2 36 A CAUTION It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in P Park with the parking brake firmly set The vehicle can roll Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure the vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P Park Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move See Shifting I
429. y the radio system To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system connect an external auxiliary device to the color coded A V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen power on If the video screen is in the DVD player mode pressing the AUX button on the remote control switches the video screen from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary device The radio can listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary See Radio s on page 3 67 for more information How to Change the RSE Video Screen Settings The screen display mode normal full and zoom screen brightness and setup menu language can be changed from the on screen setup menu To change any feature perform the following 1 Press the L display menu button on the remote control 2 Use the remote control menu A yv lt gt navigation arrows and the enter button to use the setup menu 3 Press the L button again to remove the setup menu from the screen Audio Output Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be heard through the following possible sources e Wireless Headphones Vehicle Speakers Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system if the vehicle has this feature The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to the wireless headphones if there is audio available See Headphones earlier in this section for more information When a device is connected to
430. y the dealer s sales or service departments Sometimes however despite the best intentions of all concerned misunderstandings can occur If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction the following steps should be taken STEP ONE Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management Normally concerns can be quickly resolved at that level If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales service or parts manager contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager STEP TWO If after contacting a member of dealership management it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help in the U S call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at 1 800 222 1020 In Canada call General Motors of Canada Customer Communication Centre at 1 800 263 3777 English or 1 800 263 7854 French We encourage you to call the toll free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention Have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative Vehicle Identification Number VIN This is available from the vehicle registration or title or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield e Dealership name and location Vehicle delivery date and present mileage When contacting Chevrolet remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer s facility That is why we suggest following Step One
431. ype of tires on all wheels It is all right to drive with your compact spare temporarily as it was developed for use on your vehicle See Compact Spare Tire on page 5 87 A CAUTION If you use bias ply tires on the vehicle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle If you must replace your vehicle s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type radial and bias belted tires as your vehicle s original tires Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system could give an inaccurate low pressure warning if non TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle Non TPC Spec rated tires may give a low pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5 61 5 69 Your vehicle s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label See Loading the Vehicle on page 4 21 for more information about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on your vehicle Different Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires this could affect the way your vehicle performs including i

2009 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents